Fix handling of undocumented SLL instruction for the Z80 target.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
219d1afa 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
b8891f8d 24@set CSKY
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 36@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 37@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
38@set SPU
39@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 40@set WIN32
e0001a05 41@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
42@end ifset
43@c man end
44
9160ea82
AM
45@ifnottex
46@dircategory Software development
47@direntry
252b5132 48* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
49@end direntry
50@end ifnottex
252b5132 51
0e9517a9 52@copying
e49e529d
JM
53This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56@end ifset
57version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 58
219d1afa 59Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 60
cf055d54 61Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 62under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
63or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 66section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 67@end copying
252b5132
RH
68@iftex
69@finalout
70@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 71@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 72@titlepage
71ba23f6 73@title The GNU linker
252b5132 74@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
75@subtitle @code{ld}
76@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78@end ifset
252b5132
RH
79@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80@author Steve Chamberlain
81@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
82@page
83
84@tex
85{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
86\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 88\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
89\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90}
91\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92@end tex
93
94@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 95@c man begin COPYRIGHT
219d1afa 96Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132 137@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
138@ifset ARM
139* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
141@ifset M68HC11
142* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
147@ifset M68K
148* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149@end ifset
833794fc
MR
150@ifset MIPS
151* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
159@ifset S/390
160* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
162@ifset SPU
163* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
165@ifset TICOFF
166* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
168@ifset WIN32
169* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
171@ifset XTENSA
172* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173@end ifset
252b5132
RH
174@end ifclear
175@ifclear SingleFormat
176* BFD:: BFD
177@end ifclear
178@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 182* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 183* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 184@end menu
84ec0e6d 185@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
186
187@node Overview
188@chapter Overview
189
190@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 192
0879a67a 193@ifset man
0285c67d 194@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 195ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
196@c man end
197
198@c man begin SEEALSO
199ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201@file{ld}.
202@c man end
203@end ifset
204
205@c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
ff5dcc92 207@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 208their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 209compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 210
ff5dcc92 211@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
212a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
0285c67d
NC
215@ifset man
216@c For the man only
ece2d90e 217This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
218@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
220@end ifset
221
252b5132 222@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
223This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
225write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228@end ifclear
229
230Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 233@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
234(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
0285c67d
NC
236@c man end
237
252b5132
RH
238@node Invocation
239@chapter Invocation
240
0285c67d
NC
241@c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
ff5dcc92 243The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
244and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
0285c67d
NC
247@c man end
248
252b5132
RH
249@ifset UsesEnvVars
250@menu
a05a5b64 251* Options:: Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
252* Environment:: Environment Variables
253@end menu
254
255@node Options
a05a5b64 256@section Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
257@end ifset
258
259@cindex command line
260@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
261
262@c man begin OPTIONS
263
252b5132
RH
264The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 267For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
268object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271@smallexample
272ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273@end smallexample
274
ff5dcc92 275This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
276result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
ff5dcc92 280Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
281point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
286occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288noted in the descriptions below.
289
290@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
291Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
295
296Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300message @samp{No input files}.
301
36f63dca 302If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
303assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
308@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
313
314For options whose names are a single letter,
315option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317option that requires them.
318
319For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 320precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 321@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 322this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 323only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
324@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326output.
327
328Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333accepted.
252b5132 334
36f63dca 335Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
a05a5b64 336(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
337prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
339
340@smallexample
2509a395 341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
342@end smallexample
343
344This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
345silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352@smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354@end smallexample
4e53152f 355
a05a5b64 356Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
4e53152f
NC
357linker:
358
ff5dcc92 359@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 360@include at-file.texi
dff70155 361
2509a395
SL
362@kindex -a @var{keyword}
363@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
364This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
7ee314fa
AM
370@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 377it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 378This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 379interface.
7ee314fa 380
252b5132
RH
381@ifclear SingleFormat
382@cindex binary input format
383@kindex -b @var{format}
384@kindex --format=@var{format}
385@cindex input format
386@cindex input format
387@item -b @var{input-format}
388@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
389@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 391@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 392that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 393configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 394to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
395default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399@xref{BFD}.
400
401You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403linking object files of different formats), by including
404@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 405particular format.
252b5132
RH
406
407The default format is taken from the environment variable
408@code{GNUTARGET}.
409@ifset UsesEnvVars
410@xref{Environment}.
411@end ifset
412You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
413@code{TARGET};
414@ifclear man
415see @ref{Format Commands}.
416@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
417@end ifclear
418
419@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421@cindex compatibility, MRI
422@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 424For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 425files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
426@ifclear man
427@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428@end ifclear
429@ifset man
430the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431@end ifset
432Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 433the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
434scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
436specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438@cindex common allocation
439@kindex -d
440@kindex -dc
441@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 442@item -d
252b5132
RH
443@itemx -dc
444@itemx -dp
445These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
7ee314fa
AM
451@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 460The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 461
252b5132
RH
462@cindex entry point, from command line
463@kindex -e @var{entry}
464@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 465@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
466@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
467Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
468program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
469named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
470and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
471base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
472@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
473and other ways of specifying the entry point.
474
b58f81ae
DJ
475@kindex --exclude-libs
476@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
477Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 478exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
479@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
480automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
481port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
482explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
483option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
484be treated as hidden.
485
e1c37eb5
DK
486@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
487@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
488Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
489should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
490into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
491may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
492used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
493the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
494match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
495command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
496of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
497regardless of this option.
498
252b5132
RH
499@cindex dynamic symbol table
500@kindex -E
501@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 502@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
503@item -E
504@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
505@itemx --no-export-dynamic
506When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
507option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
508all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
509set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
510
511If you do not use either of these options (or use the
512@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
513dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
514referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
515
516If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
517back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
518dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
519linking the program itself.
520
55255dae 521You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 522be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 523See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 524
8b747e1a
DK
525Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
526support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
527the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
528
36f63dca 529@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
530@cindex big-endian objects
531@cindex endianness
532@kindex -EB
533@item -EB
534Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
535
536@cindex little-endian objects
537@kindex -EL
538@item -EL
539Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 540@end ifclear
252b5132 541
2509a395
SL
542@kindex -f @var{name}
543@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
544@item -f @var{name}
545@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
546When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
547to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
548table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
549symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
550
551If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
552run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
553the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
554first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
555@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
556in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
557Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
558implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
559machine specific performance.
560
561This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
562will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
563
2509a395
SL
564@kindex -F @var{name}
565@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 566@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 567@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
568When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
569the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
570of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
571on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
572
573If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
574run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
575dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
576filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
577found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
578used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
579@var{name}.
580
ff5dcc92 581Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 582toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
583object files.
584@ifclear SingleFormat
585The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 586@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 587@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
588environment variable.
589@end ifclear
590The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
591creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 592
3dbf70a2 593@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
594@kindex -fini=@var{name}
595@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
596When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
597executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
598address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
599the function to call.
600
252b5132
RH
601@kindex -g
602@item -g
603Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
604
2509a395
SL
605@kindex -G @var{value}
606@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 607@cindex object size
2509a395 608@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
609@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
610Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
611@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 612MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
613sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
614
615@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 616@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 617@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 618@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
619@itemx -soname=@var{name}
620When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
621the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
622which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
623linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
624field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
625
626@kindex -i
627@cindex incremental link
628@item -i
629Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
630
3dbf70a2 631@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
632@kindex -init=@var{name}
633@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
634When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
635executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
636of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
637function to call.
638
252b5132 639@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 640@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 641@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 642@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
643@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
644Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
645list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
646If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 647will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 648will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 649
ff5dcc92 650On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
651files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
652and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
653called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
654@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
655indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
656to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
657@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
658
659The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
660specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
661was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
662command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
663archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
664the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
665
ff5dcc92 666See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
667archives multiple times.
668
669You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
670
671@ifset GENERIC
672This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 673if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
674behaviour of the AIX linker.
675@end ifset
676
677@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 678@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 679@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 680@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 681@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
682Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
683for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
684option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
685in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
686on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 687@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
688order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
689how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
690option is specified.
252b5132 691
3aa2d05a
NC
692If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
693prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
694@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 695
252b5132
RH
696@ifset UsesEnvVars
697The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 698@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
699some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
700@end ifset
701
702The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
703@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
704at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
705
706@cindex emulation
707@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 708@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
709Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
710emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
711
712If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
713@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
714
715Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
716configured.
717
718@cindex link map
719@kindex -M
720@kindex --print-map
721@item -M
722@itemx --print-map
723Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
724information about the link, including the following:
725
726@itemize @bullet
727@item
3b83e13a 728Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
729@item
730How common symbols are allocated.
731@item
732All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
733which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
734@item
735The values assigned to symbols.
736
737Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
738involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
739have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
740linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
741of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
742the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
743linker script containing:
744
745@smallexample
746 foo = 1
747 foo = foo * 4
748 foo = foo + 8
749@end smallexample
750
751will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
752option is used:
753
754@smallexample
755 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
757 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
758@end smallexample
759
760See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
761scripts.
252b5132
RH
762@end itemize
763
764@kindex -n
765@cindex read-only text
766@cindex NMAGIC
767@kindex --nmagic
768@item -n
769@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
770Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
771libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
772mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
773
774@kindex -N
775@kindex --omagic
776@cindex read/write from cmd line
777@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 778@item -N
252b5132
RH
779@itemx --omagic
780Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
781not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
782libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
783mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
784is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
785specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
786
787@kindex --no-omagic
788@cindex OMAGIC
789@item --no-omagic
790This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
791sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
792be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
793shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
794
795@kindex -o @var{output}
796@kindex --output=@var{output}
797@cindex naming the output file
798@item -o @var{output}
799@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 800Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
801option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
802script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
803
804@kindex -O @var{level}
805@cindex generating optimized output
806@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 807If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 808the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
809should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
810option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
811the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
812no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
813of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 814
387dd777
DP
815@kindex -plugin @var{name}
816@item -plugin @var{name}
817Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
818the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
819automatically added by the complier, when using link time
820optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
821wish.
822
823Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
824from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
825@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
826those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
827copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
828based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
6c19b93b 829just copy in the newest one.
387dd777 830
26278bb8
UD
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 856@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
857Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
858flags governing input file handling.
859
a712da20
NC
860@kindex -q
861@kindex --emit-relocs
862@cindex retain relocations in final executable
863@item -q
864@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 865Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
866Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
867order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
868in larger executables.
869
dbab7a7b
NC
870This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
871
4f471f39
RS
872@kindex --force-dynamic
873@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
874@item --force-dynamic
875Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
876to VxWorks targets.
877
252b5132
RH
878@cindex partial link
879@cindex relocatable output
880@kindex -r
1049f94e 881@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 882@item -r
1049f94e 883@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 884Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 885turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
886linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
887magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
888@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 889@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
890If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
891linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
892constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
893
62bf86b4
HPN
894When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
895partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
896relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
897example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
898with input files in other formats at all.
899
252b5132
RH
900This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
901
902@kindex -R @var{file}
903@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
904@cindex symbol-only input
905@item -R @var{filename}
906@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
907Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
908relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
909to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
910programs. You may use this option more than once.
911
ff5dcc92 912For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 913followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 914the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
915
916@kindex -s
917@kindex --strip-all
918@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 919@item -s
252b5132
RH
920@itemx --strip-all
921Omit all symbol information from the output file.
922
923@kindex -S
924@kindex --strip-debug
925@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 926@item -S
252b5132
RH
927@itemx --strip-debug
928Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
929
a70f34c0
NC
930@kindex --strip-discarded
931@kindex --no-strip-discarded
932@item --strip-discarded
933@itemx --no-strip-discarded
934Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
935Enabled by default.
936
252b5132
RH
937@kindex -t
938@kindex --trace
939@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 940@item -t
252b5132 941@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 942Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
943
944@kindex -T @var{script}
945@kindex --script=@var{script}
946@cindex script files
947@item -T @var{scriptfile}
948@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
949Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 950@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 951@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
952output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
953the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
954specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
955options accumulate.
252b5132 956
14be8564
L
957@kindex -dT @var{script}
958@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
959@cindex script files
960@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
961@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
962Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
963
964This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
965processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
966command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
967@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
968behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
969command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
970the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
971@samp{gcc}).
972
252b5132
RH
973@kindex -u @var{symbol}
974@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
975@cindex undefined symbol
976@item -u @var{symbol}
977@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
978Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
979symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
980modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
981different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
982option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
983
0a618243
AB
984If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
985into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
986undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
987instead.
988
989@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
990@cindex symbols, require defined
991@cindex defined symbol
992@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
993Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
994is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
995is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
996and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
997@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
998can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
999
252b5132
RH
1000@kindex -Ur
1001@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1002@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1003For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1004@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1005turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1006@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1007It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1008with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1009be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1010@samp{-r} for the others.
1011
c005eb9e
AB
1012@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1013@cindex orphan sections
1014@cindex sections, orphan
1015@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1016Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1017specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1018
1019@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1020
1021@table @code
1022@item place
1023Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1024the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1025@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1026
1027@item discard
1028All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1029@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1030
1031@item warn
1032The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1033issue a warning.
1034
1035@item error
1036The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1037@end table
1038
1039The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1040
577a0623
AM
1041@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1042@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1043Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1044@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1045missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1046specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1047multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1048input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1049in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1050
252b5132
RH
1051@kindex -v
1052@kindex -V
1053@kindex --version
1054@cindex version
1055@item -v
1056@itemx --version
1057@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1058Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1059lists the supported emulations.
1060
1061@kindex -x
1062@kindex --discard-all
1063@cindex deleting local symbols
1064@item -x
1065@itemx --discard-all
1066Delete all local symbols.
1067
1068@kindex -X
1069@kindex --discard-locals
1070@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1071@item -X
252b5132 1072@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1073Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1074system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1075or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1076
1077@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1078@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1079@cindex symbol tracing
1080@item -y @var{symbol}
1081@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1082Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1083option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1084to prepend an underscore.
1085
1086This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1087don't know where the reference is coming from.
1088
1089@kindex -Y @var{path}
1090@item -Y @var{path}
1091Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1092for Solaris compatibility.
1093
1094@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1095@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1096The recognized keywords are:
1097@table @samp
1098
e6e2dfbd
AM
1099@item bndplt
1100Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1101
1102@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1103@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1104@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1105@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1106Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1107to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1108@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1109@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1110@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1111@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1112Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1113
cd6d6c15 1114@item combreloc
e6e2dfbd
AM
1115@itemx nocombreloc
1116Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1117dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
cd6d6c15 1118
b8871f35 1119@item common
e6e2dfbd
AM
1120@itemx nocommon
1121Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1122link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1123
1124@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1125Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1126layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1127using pages of this size.
b8871f35 1128
cd6d6c15 1129@item defs
97a232d7
NC
1130Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1131is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1132This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
cd6d6c15 1133
e6e2dfbd
AM
1134@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1135@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1136Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1137if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1138by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1139@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1140may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1141selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1142these options.
1143
6aa29e7b
JJ
1144@item execstack
1145Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1146
b039ef04
L
1147@item global
1148This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1149the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1150of subsequently loaded libraries.
1151
93ab9c0d
NC
1152@item globalaudit
1153This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1154This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1155setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1156tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
a05a5b64 1157the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
6c19b93b 1158all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
93ab9c0d 1159
e6e2dfbd
AM
1160@item ibtplt
1161Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1162Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1163
8df93cb5 1164@item ibt
e6e2dfbd
AM
1165Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1166to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1167Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1168
cd6d6c15
NC
1169@item initfirst
1170This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1171It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1172before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1173the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1174the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1175objects.
1176
1177@item interpose
e6e2dfbd
AM
1178Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1179so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1180libraries not so marked.
cd6d6c15 1181
5fa222e4
AM
1182@item lazy
1183When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1184dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1185the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1186Lazy binding is the default.
1187
cd6d6c15 1188@item loadfltr
e6e2dfbd 1189Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
cd6d6c15 1190
e6e2dfbd
AM
1191@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1192Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
cd6d6c15 1193
e6e2dfbd
AM
1194@item muldefs
1195Allow multiple definitions.
b8871f35 1196
cd6d6c15 1197@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1198Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1199defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1200
1201@item nodefaultlib
e6e2dfbd
AM
1202Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1203should ignore any default library search paths.
cd6d6c15
NC
1204
1205@item nodelete
e6e2dfbd 1206Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
cd6d6c15
NC
1207
1208@item nodlopen
e6e2dfbd 1209Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
cd6d6c15
NC
1210
1211@item nodump
e6e2dfbd 1212Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
cd6d6c15 1213
6aa29e7b
JJ
1214@item noexecstack
1215Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1216
e6e2dfbd
AM
1217@item noextern-protected-data
1218Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1219library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1220used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1221generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1222module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1223i386 and x86-64.
8dfef1bd 1224
e6e2dfbd
AM
1225@item noreloc-overflow
1226Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1227relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1228overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
6aa29e7b 1229
cd6d6c15
NC
1230@item now
1231When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1232dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
e6e2dfbd
AM
1233when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1234function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1235called.
cd6d6c15
NC
1236
1237@item origin
e6e2dfbd 1238Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
cd6d6c15 1239
6aa29e7b 1240@item relro
e6e2dfbd 1241@itemx norelro
def5c83c
AM
1242Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1243specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1244relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1245than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
e6e2dfbd 1246Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
6aa29e7b 1247
47acac12
L
1248@item separate-code
1249@itemx noseparate-code
1250Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1251specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1252be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1253code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1254
e6e2dfbd
AM
1255@item shstk
1256Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1257to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1258Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
24718e3b 1259
04c3a755 1260@item stack-size=@var{value}
e6e2dfbd 1261Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
04c3a755
NS
1262Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1263@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1264
e6e2dfbd
AM
1265@item text
1266@itemx notext
1267@itemx textoff
1268Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1269relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1270@samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
48580982 1271
97a232d7
NC
1272@item undefs
1273Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1274either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1275This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1276
cd6d6c15
NC
1277@end table
1278
ece2d90e 1279Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1280
1281@kindex -(
1282@cindex groups of archives
1283@item -( @var{archives} -)
1284@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1285The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1286either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1287
1288The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1289references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1290the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1291archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1292object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1293would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1294they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1295resolved.
1296
1297Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1298it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1299more archives.
1300
69da35b5
NC
1301@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1302@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1303@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1304@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1305Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1306recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1307and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1308the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1309behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1310so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1311restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1312
4a43e768
AM
1313@kindex --as-needed
1314@kindex --no-as-needed
1315@item --as-needed
1316@itemx --no-as-needed
1317This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1318on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1319the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1320on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1321needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1322emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1323non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1324the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1325non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1326Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1327the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1328needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1329from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1330
e56f61be
L
1331@kindex --add-needed
1332@kindex --no-add-needed
1333@item --add-needed
1334@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1335These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1336their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1337options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1338and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1339
252b5132
RH
1340@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1341@item -assert @var{keyword}
1342This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1343
1344@kindex -Bdynamic
1345@kindex -dy
1346@kindex -call_shared
1347@item -Bdynamic
1348@itemx -dy
1349@itemx -call_shared
1350Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1351for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1352default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1353for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1354multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1355@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1356
a1ab1d2a
UD
1357@kindex -Bgroup
1358@item -Bgroup
1359Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1360section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1361object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1362@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1363only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1364
252b5132
RH
1365@kindex -Bstatic
1366@kindex -dn
1367@kindex -non_shared
1368@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1369@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1370@itemx -dn
1371@itemx -non_shared
1372@itemx -static
1373Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1374platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1375variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1376may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1377library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1378option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1379option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1380shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1381references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1382libraries.
252b5132
RH
1383
1384@kindex -Bsymbolic
1385@item -Bsymbolic
1386When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1387definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1388for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1389within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1390@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1391executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1392the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1393support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1394
40b36307
L
1395@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1396@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1397When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1398symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1399This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1400when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1401to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1402This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1403libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1404
55255dae
L
1405@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1406@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1407Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1408typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1409global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1410within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1411to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1412in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1413which support shared libraries.
1414
1415The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1416scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1417
40b36307
L
1418@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1419@item --dynamic-list-data
1420Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1421
1422@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1423@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1424Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1425is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1426
0b8a70d9
L
1427@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1428@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1429Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1430
252b5132
RH
1431@kindex --check-sections
1432@kindex --no-check-sections
1433@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1434@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1435Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1436been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1437perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1438suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1439allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
a05a5b64 1440restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1441Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1442force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1443option.
252b5132 1444
ddbb8a31
NC
1445@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1446@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1447@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1448@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1449This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1450by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1451command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1452output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1453input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1454specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1455follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1456behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1457
1458This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1459libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1460mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1461their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1462required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1463the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1464dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1465symbols.
1466
252b5132
RH
1467@cindex cross reference table
1468@kindex --cref
1469@item --cref
1470Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1471generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1472Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1473
1474The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1475easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1476sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1477symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1478definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1479where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1480symbol are listed.
252b5132 1481
4818e05f
AM
1482@cindex common allocation
1483@kindex --no-define-common
1484@item --no-define-common
1485This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1486The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1487@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1488
1489The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1490the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1491of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1492forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1493Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1494from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1495This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1496and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1497duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1498paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1499
7bdf4127
AB
1500@cindex group allocation in linker script
1501@cindex section groups
1502@cindex COMDAT
1503@kindex --force-group-allocation
1504@item --force-group-allocation
1505This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1506normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1507default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1508change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1509command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1510effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1511
252b5132 1512@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1513@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1514@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1515Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1516address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1517times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1518limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1519context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1520symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1521constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1522using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1523@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1524equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1525
1526@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1527@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1528@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1529@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1530@itemx --no-demangle
1531These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1532and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1533present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1534underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1535mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1536different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1537to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1538demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1539is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1540
1541@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1542@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1543@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1544@item -I@var{file}
1545@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1546Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1547generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1548linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1549doing.
1550
9b8b325a
RF
1551@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1552@item --no-dynamic-linker
1553When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1554linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1555executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1556entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1557
a70f34c0
NC
1558@kindex --embedded-relocs
1559@item --embedded-relocs
1560This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1561that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1562is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1563targets.
1564
3f0a5f17
ME
1565@kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1566@item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1567Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1568in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1569
7ce691ae 1570@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1571@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1572@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1573@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1574Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1575with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1576
252b5132
RH
1577@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1578@item --force-exe-suffix
1579Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1580
1581If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1582@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1583the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1584option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1585Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1586it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1587
1588@kindex --gc-sections
1589@kindex --no-gc-sections
1590@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1591@item --gc-sections
1592@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1593Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1594targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1595performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1596@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1597collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1598implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1599
d5465ba2
AM
1600@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1601examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1602symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1603command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1604referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1605libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1606referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1607the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1608relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1609
ac69cbc6 1610This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1611@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1612specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1613a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1614
c17d87de
NC
1615@kindex --print-gc-sections
1616@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1617@cindex garbage collection
1618@item --print-gc-sections
1619@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1620List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1621printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1622collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1623default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1624be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1625line.
1626
22185505 1627@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1628@cindex garbage collection
1629@item --gc-keep-exported
1630When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1631collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1632default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1633executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1634collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1635Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1636it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1637ELF format targets.
1638
30824704
RM
1639@kindex --print-output-format
1640@cindex output format
1641@item --print-output-format
1642Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1643other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1644in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1645
3604cb1f
TG
1646@kindex --print-memory-usage
1647@cindex memory usage
1648@item --print-memory-usage
1649Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1650the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1651quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1652headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1653parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1654
1655@smallexample
1656Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1657 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1658 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1659@end smallexample
1660
252b5132
RH
1661@cindex help
1662@cindex usage
1663@kindex --help
1664@item --help
1665Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1666
ea20a7da
CC
1667@kindex --target-help
1668@item --target-help
1669Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1670
2509a395
SL
1671@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1672@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1673Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1674@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1675
1676@cindex memory usage
1677@kindex --no-keep-memory
1678@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1679@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1680symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1681instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1682necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1683while linking a large executable.
1684
1685@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1686@kindex -z defs
97a232d7 1687@kindex -z undefs
252b5132 1688@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1689@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1690Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1691is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1692The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1693behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1694libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1695
97a232d7
NC
1696The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1697
aa713662
L
1698@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1699@kindex -z muldefs
1700@item --allow-multiple-definition
1701@itemx -z muldefs
1702Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1703report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1704first definition will be used.
1705
b79e8c78 1706@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1707@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1708@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1709@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1710Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1711This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1712determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1713shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1714how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1715
903249d7
NC
1716The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1717referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1718an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1719a shared library.
1720
1721The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1722libraries specified at link time are that:
1723
1724@itemize @bullet
1725@item
1726A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1727that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1728resolvable at load time.
1729@item
1730There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1731symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1732
1733The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1734select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1735architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1736appropriate memset function.
1737@end itemize
b79e8c78 1738
31941635
L
1739@kindex --no-undefined-version
1740@item --no-undefined-version
1741Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1742it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1743will be issued instead.
1744
3e3b46e5
PB
1745@kindex --default-symver
1746@item --default-symver
1747Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1748exported symbols.
1749
1750@kindex --default-imported-symver
1751@item --default-imported-symver
1752Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1753imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1754
252b5132
RH
1755@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1756@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1757Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1758files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1759been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1760This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1761errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1762have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1763inappropriate.
1764
fe7929ce
AM
1765@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1766@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1767Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1768library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1769
252b5132
RH
1770@kindex --no-whole-archive
1771@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1772Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1773archive files.
1774
1775@cindex output file after errors
1776@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1777@item --noinhibit-exec
1778Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1779Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1780errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1781when it issues any error whatsoever.
1782
0a9c1c8e
CD
1783@kindex -nostdlib
1784@item -nostdlib
1785Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1786command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1787(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1788
252b5132 1789@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1790@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1791@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1792@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1793file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1794@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1795object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1796object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1797should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1798usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1799name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1800list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1801command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1802this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1803@end ifclear
1804
76359541
TP
1805@kindex --out-implib
1806@item --out-implib @var{file}
1807Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1808the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1809library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1810may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1811behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1812step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1813the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1814
36af4a4e
JJ
1815@kindex -pie
1816@kindex --pic-executable
1817@item -pie
1818@itemx --pic-executable
1819@cindex position independent executables
1820Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1821ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1822libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1823address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1824normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1825defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1826
252b5132
RH
1827@kindex -qmagic
1828@item -qmagic
1829This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1830
1831@kindex -Qy
1832@item -Qy
1833This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1834
1835@kindex --relax
1836@cindex synthesizing linker
1837@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1838@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1839@item --relax
28d5f677 1840@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1841An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1842@ifset GENERIC
1843This option is only supported on a few targets.
1844@end ifset
1845@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1846@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132 1847@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1848@ifset XTENSA
1849@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1850@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1851@ifset M68HC11
1852@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1853@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1854@ifset NIOSII
1855@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1856@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1857@ifset POWERPC
1858@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1859@end ifset
252b5132 1860
28d5f677
NC
1861On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1862global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1863addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1864synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1865instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1866
1867On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1868debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1869@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1870This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1871family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1872@end ifset
1873
1874@ifset GENERIC
1875On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1876but ignored.
1877@end ifset
1878
28d5f677
NC
1879On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1880@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1881
252b5132
RH
1882@cindex retaining specified symbols
1883@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1884@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1885@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1886@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1887Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1888discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1889symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1890@ifset GENERIC
1891(such as VxWorks)
1892@end ifset
1893where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1894run-time memory.
1895
1896@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1897or symbols needed for relocations.
1898
1899You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1900line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1901
1902@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1903@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1904@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1905@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1906Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1907linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1908arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1909them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1910also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1911objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1912@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1913ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1914@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1915
ff5dcc92 1916The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1917SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1918@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1919runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1920options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1921gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1922file systems.
252b5132 1923
ff5dcc92 1924For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1925followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1926the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1927@end ifset
1928
1929@ifset GENERIC
1930@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1931@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1932@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1933When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1934happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1935of the input files.
1936
1937When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1938non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1939shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1940explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1941specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1942@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1943either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1944appearing multiple times.
1945
e680a6b6
NC
1946The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1947directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1948containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1949and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
195064-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1951
1952The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1953@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1954supported.
1955
28c309a2
NC
1956This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1957that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1958is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1959runtime linker would do.
1960
252b5132 1961The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1962libraries:
252b5132
RH
1963@enumerate
1964@item
ff5dcc92 1965Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1966@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1967Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1968between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1969specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1970used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1971at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1972by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1973the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1974@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1975On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1976@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1977environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1978@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1979On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1980directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1981@item
a1b8d843 1982For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1983variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1984@item
ec4eb78a
L
1985For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1986@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1987libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1988@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1989@item
252b5132
RH
1990The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1991@item
1992For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1993exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1994@end enumerate
1995
1996If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1997warning and continue with the link.
1998@end ifset
1999
2000@kindex -shared
2001@kindex -Bshareable
2002@item -shared
2003@itemx -Bshareable
2004@cindex shared libraries
2005Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2006and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2007shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2008undefined symbols in the link.
2009
252b5132 2010@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2011@item --sort-common
2012@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2013@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2014This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2015ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2016sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2017eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2018between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2019specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2020
2509a395
SL
2021@kindex --sort-section=name
2022@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2023This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2024patterns in the linker script.
2025
2509a395
SL
2026@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2027@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2028This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2029patterns in the linker script.
2030
a70f34c0
NC
2031@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2032@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2033This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2034.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2035post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2036
252b5132 2037@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2038@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2039Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2040each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2041size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2042
2043@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2044@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2045Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2046output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2047This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2048certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2049cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2050that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2051support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2052input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2053more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2054many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2055
2056@kindex --stats
2057@item --stats
2058Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2059as execution time and memory usage.
2060
2509a395 2061@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2062@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2063Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2064configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2065that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2066
a70f34c0
NC
2067@kindex --task-link
2068@item --task-link
2069This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2070file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2071
252b5132
RH
2072@kindex --traditional-format
2073@cindex traditional format
2074@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2075For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2076the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2077use the traditional format instead.
2078
2079@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2080For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2081symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2082full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2083@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2084trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2085combine duplicate entries.
2086
2509a395
SL
2087@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2088@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2089Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2090address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2091times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2092line.
2093@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2094for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2095@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2096should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2097sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2098
2509a395
SL
2099@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2100@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2101@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2102@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2103@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2104@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2105@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2106Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2107@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2108
2509a395
SL
2109@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2110@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2111@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2112When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2113byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2114
9d5777a3
RM
2115@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2116@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2117@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2118When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2119the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2120text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2121
0d705e9f
AM
2122@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2123@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2124@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2125When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2126model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2127
560e09e9
NC
2128@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2129@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2130Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2131values for @samp{method}:
2132
2133@table @samp
2134@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2135Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2136
2137@item report-all
da8bce14 2138Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2139
2140@item ignore-in-object-files
2141Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2142ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2143
2144@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2145Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2146ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2147when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2148libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2149command line.
2150@end table
2151
2152The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2153by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2154
2155Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2156unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2157can change this to a warning.
2158
1715a13c
L
2159@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2160@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2161@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2162@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2163Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2164supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2165the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2166argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2167
2168@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2169@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2170@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2171Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2172used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2173about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2174is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2175see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2176use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2177symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2178@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2179
7ce691ae 2180@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2181@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2182@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2183@item --warn-common
2184Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2185a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2186but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2187you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2188Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2189warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2190
2191There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2192
2193@table @samp
2194@item int i = 1;
2195A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2196file.
2197
2198@item extern int i;
2199An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2200There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2201variable somewhere.
2202
2203@item int i;
2204A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2205variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2206The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2207single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2208size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2209a definition of the same variable.
2210@end table
2211
2212The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2213Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2214just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2215encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2216a common symbol.
2217
2218@enumerate
2219@item
2220Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2221definition for the symbol.
2222@smallexample
2223@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2224 overridden by definition
2225@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2226@end smallexample
2227
2228@item
2229Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2230the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2231except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2232@smallexample
2233@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2234 overriding common
2235@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2236@end smallexample
2237
2238@item
2239Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2240@smallexample
2241@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2242 of `@var{symbol}'
2243@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2244@end smallexample
2245
2246@item
2247Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2248@smallexample
2249@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2250 overridden by larger common
2251@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2252@end smallexample
2253
2254@item
2255Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2256the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2257encountered in a different order.
2258@smallexample
2259@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2260 overriding smaller common
2261@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2262@end smallexample
2263@end enumerate
2264
2265@kindex --warn-constructors
2266@item --warn-constructors
2267Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2268object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2269detect the use of global constructors.
2270
2271@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2272@item --warn-multiple-gp
2273Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2274This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2275Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2276section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2277of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2278base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2279base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2280bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2281large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2282values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2283option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2284
2285@kindex --warn-once
2286@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2287@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2288@item --warn-once
2289Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2290which refers to it.
2291
2292@kindex --warn-section-align
2293@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2294@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2295@item --warn-section-align
2296Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2297alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2298The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2299is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2300the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2301
8fdd7217
NC
2302@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2303@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2304Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2305
a0c402a5
L
2306@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2307@item --warn-alternate-em
2308Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2309
560e09e9
NC
2310@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2311@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2312If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2313@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2314This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2315
2316@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2317@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2318This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2319it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2320
252b5132
RH
2321@kindex --whole-archive
2322@cindex including an entire archive
2323@item --whole-archive
2324For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2325@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2326in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2327files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2328library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2329library. This option may be used more than once.
2330
7ec229ce 2331Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2332about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2333Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2334list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2335your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2336
2509a395
SL
2337@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2338@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2339Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2340@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2341undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2342@var{symbol}.
2343
2344This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2345wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2346wishes to call the system function, it should call
2347@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2348
2349Here is a trivial example:
2350
2351@smallexample
2352void *
cc2f008e 2353__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2354@{
cc2f008e 2355 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2356 return __real_malloc (c);
2357@}
2358@end smallexample
2359
ff5dcc92 2360If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2361all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2362instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2363call the real @code{malloc} function.
2364
2365You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2366links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2367you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2368file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2369call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2370
6aa29e7b 2371@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2372@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2373@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2374@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2375Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2376(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2377section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2378
e41b3a13
JJ
2379@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2380@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2381Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2382generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2383if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2384
6c1439be
L
2385@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2386@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2387@item --enable-new-dtags
2388@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2389This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2390systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2391@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2392and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2393If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2394created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2395those options are only available for ELF systems.
2396
2d643429 2397@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2398@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2399Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2400close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2401time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2402increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2403value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2404
fdc90cb4
JJ
2405@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2406@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2407Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2408@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2409new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2410the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2411hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2412
0ce398f1
L
2413@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2414@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2415@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2416@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2417@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2418@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2419@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2420@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2421On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2422compressed using zlib.
2423
2424@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2425sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2426DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2427instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2428also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2429sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2430
2431The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2432@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2433
2434Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2435sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2436for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2437uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2438
2439The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2440involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2441default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2442@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2443
35835446
JR
2444@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2445@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2446This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2447linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2448for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2449about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2450
4f9c04f7 2451Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 24521021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2453run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2454has been used.
2455
2456The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2457enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2458
c0065db7
RM
2459@kindex --build-id
2460@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2461@item --build-id
2462@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2463Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2464or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2465unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2466@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2467@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2468@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2469the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2470string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2471@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2472is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2473
2474The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2475that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2476unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2477to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2478file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2479string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2480
2481Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2482@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2483@end table
2484
0285c67d
NC
2485@c man end
2486
36f63dca 2487@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2488
0285c67d
NC
2489@c man begin OPTIONS
2490
ff5dcc92 2491The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2492the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2493normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2494use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2495@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2496like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2497symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2498object file).
2499
2500In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
a05a5b64 2501support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
252b5132
RH
2502PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2503values by either a space or an equals sign.
2504
ff5dcc92 2505@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2506
2507@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2508@item --add-stdcall-alias
2509If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2510as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2511[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2512
2513@kindex --base-file
2514@item --base-file @var{file}
2515Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2516addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2517@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2518[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2519
2520@kindex --dll
2521@item --dll
2522Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2523@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2524file.
bb10df36 2525[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2526
88183869
DK
2527@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2528@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2529@item --enable-long-section-names
2530@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2531The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2532the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2533for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2534fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2535to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2536allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2537disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2538generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2539as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2540with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2541GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2542information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2543option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2544section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2545when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2546image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2547[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2548
252b5132
RH
2549@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2550@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2551@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2552@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2553If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2554do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2555only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2556resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2557undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2558@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2559to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2560warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2561import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2562to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2563feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2564@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2565mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2566[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2567
522f09cd
KT
2568@kindex --leading-underscore
2569@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2570@item --leading-underscore
2571@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2572For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2573in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2574disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2575
252b5132
RH
2576@cindex DLLs, creating
2577@kindex --export-all-symbols
2578@item --export-all-symbols
2579If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2580be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2581otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2582explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2583attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2584option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2585@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2586@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2587exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2588re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2589such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2590@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2591@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2592Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2593not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2594extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2595(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2596These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2597@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2598@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2599@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2600@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2601[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2602
2603@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2604@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2605Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2606exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2607[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2608
2927aaca
NC
2609@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2610@item --exclude-all-symbols
2611Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2612[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2613
252b5132
RH
2614@kindex --file-alignment
2615@item --file-alignment
2616Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2617file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2618512.
bb10df36 2619[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2620
2621@cindex heap size
2622@kindex --heap
2623@item --heap @var{reserve}
2624@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2625Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2626to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2627committed.
bb10df36 2628[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2629
2630@cindex image base
2631@kindex --image-base
2632@item --image-base @var{value}
2633Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2634the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2635is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2636your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2637other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2638for dlls.
bb10df36 2639[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2640
2641@kindex --kill-at
2642@item --kill-at
2643If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2644symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2645[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2646
26d2d8a2
BF
2647@kindex --large-address-aware
2648@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2649If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2650header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2651greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2652or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2653section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2654[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2655
f69a2f97
NC
2656@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2657@item --disable-large-address-aware
2658Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2659This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2660driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2661addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2662[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2663
252b5132
RH
2664@kindex --major-image-version
2665@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2666Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2667[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2668
2669@kindex --major-os-version
2670@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2671Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2672[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2673
2674@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2675@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2676Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2677[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2678
2679@kindex --minor-image-version
2680@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2681Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2682[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2683
2684@kindex --minor-os-version
2685@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2686Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2687[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2688
2689@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2690@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2691Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2692[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2693
2694@cindex DEF files, creating
2695@cindex DLLs, creating
2696@kindex --output-def
2697@item --output-def @var{file}
2698The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2699file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2700(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2701library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2702automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2703[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2704
b044cda1 2705@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2706@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2707@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2708@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2709Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2710@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2711By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2712for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2713execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2714[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2715
2716@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2717@item --disable-auto-image-base
2718Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2719user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2720default.
bb10df36 2721[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2722
2723@cindex DLLs, linking to
2724@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2725@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2726When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2727search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2728@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2729between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2730uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2731@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2732[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2733
2734@kindex --enable-auto-import
2735@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e 2736Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
317ff008
EB
2737DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2738mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2739[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2740
2741The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2742feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2743
2744Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2745of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2746PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
4d8907ac 2747
e2a83dd0
NC
2748Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2749data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2750placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2751around a problem with consts that is described here:
2752http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2753
4d8907ac
DS
2754Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2755see this message:
0d888aac 2756
ece2d90e 2757"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2758documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2759
ece2d90e
NC
2760This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2761ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2762allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2763fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2764constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2765multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2766this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2767of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2768the warning, and exit.
2769
2770There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2771data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2772
2fa9fc65
NC
2773One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2774of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2775this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2776
c0065db7
RM
2777A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2778that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2779there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2780a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2781
2782@example
2783extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2784extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2785 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2786@end example
2787
2788or
2789
2790@example
2791extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2792extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2793 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2794@end example
2795
c0065db7 2796For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2797is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2798
2799@example
2800extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2801extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2802 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2803@end example
2804
c406afaf
NC
2805or
2806
2807@example
2808extern long long extern_ll;
2809extern_ll -->
2810 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2811@end example
2812
2fa9fc65 2813A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2814'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2815@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2816requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2817building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2818merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2819between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2820constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2821
2822Original:
2823@example
2824--foo.h
2825extern int arr[];
2826--foo.c
2827#include "foo.h"
2828void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2829 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2830@}
2831@end example
2832
2833Solution 1:
2834@example
2835--foo.h
2836extern int arr[];
2837--foo.c
2838#include "foo.h"
2839void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2840 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2841 volatile int *parr = arr;
2842 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2843@}
2844@end example
2845
2846Solution 2:
2847@example
2848--foo.h
2849/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2850#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2851 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2852#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2853#else
2854#define FOO_IMPORT
2855#endif
2856extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2857--foo.c
2858#include "foo.h"
2859void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2860 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2861@}
2862@end example
2863
c0065db7 2864A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2865library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2866for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2867functions).
b044cda1
CW
2868
2869@kindex --disable-auto-import
2870@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2871Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2872@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2873[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2874
2fa9fc65
NC
2875@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2876@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2877If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2878that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2879a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2880environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2881[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2882
2883@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2884@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
317ff008 2885Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2886[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2887
b044cda1
CW
2888@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2889@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2890Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2891[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2892
252b5132
RH
2893@kindex --section-alignment
2894@item --section-alignment
2895Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2896addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2897[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2898
2899@cindex stack size
2900@kindex --stack
2901@item --stack @var{reserve}
2902@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2903Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2904to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2905committed.
bb10df36 2906[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2907
2908@kindex --subsystem
2909@item --subsystem @var{which}
2910@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2911@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2912Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2913legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2914@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2915the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2916@var{which}.
bb10df36 2917[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2918
2f563b51
DK
2919The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2920of the PE file header:
2921[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2922
2d5c3743
NC
2923@kindex --high-entropy-va
2924@item --high-entropy-va
2925Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2926(ASLR).
2927
2f563b51
DK
2928@kindex --dynamicbase
2929@item --dynamicbase
2930The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2931randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2932Vista for i386 PE targets.
2933
2934@kindex --forceinteg
2935@item --forceinteg
2936Code integrity checks are enforced.
2937
2938@kindex --nxcompat
2939@item --nxcompat
2940The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2941This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2942
2943@kindex --no-isolation
2944@item --no-isolation
2945Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2946
2947@kindex --no-seh
2948@item --no-seh
2949The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2950this image.
2951
2952@kindex --no-bind
2953@item --no-bind
2954Do not bind this image.
2955
2956@kindex --wdmdriver
2957@item --wdmdriver
2958The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2959
2f563b51
DK
2960@kindex --tsaware
2961@item --tsaware
2962The image is Terminal Server aware.
2963
0cb112f7
CF
2964@kindex --insert-timestamp
2965@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2966@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2967Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2968as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2969other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2970will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2971same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2972can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2973that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2974identically.
252b5132
RH
2975@end table
2976
0285c67d
NC
2977@c man end
2978
ac145307
BS
2979@ifset C6X
2980@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2981
2982@c man begin OPTIONS
2983
2984The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2985libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2986all executables use an index of 0.
2987
2988@table @gcctabopt
2989
2990@kindex --dsbt-size
2991@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2992This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2993or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2994entries.
2995
2996@kindex --dsbt-index
2997@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2998This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2999to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3000executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3001@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3002
fbd9ad90
PB
3003@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3004The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3005exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3006
ac145307
BS
3007@end table
3008
3009@c man end
3010@end ifset
3011
b8891f8d
AJ
3012@ifset CSKY
3013@subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3014
3015@c man begin OPTIONS
3016
3017@table @gcctabopt
3018
3019@kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3020@item --branch-stub
3021This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3022sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3023usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3024can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3025the compiler or assembler.
3026
3027@kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3028@item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3029This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3030It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3031be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3032stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3033sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3034@samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3035linker should choose suitable defaults.
3036
3037@end table
3038
3039@c man end
3040@end ifset
3041
93fd0973
SC
3042@ifset M68HC11
3043@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3044
3045@c man begin OPTIONS
3046
3047The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3048memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3049
3050@table @gcctabopt
3051
3052@kindex --no-trampoline
3053@item --no-trampoline
3054This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3055is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3056instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3057
3058@kindex --bank-window
3059@item --bank-window @var{name}
3060This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3061the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3062The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3063paging and addresses within the memory window.
3064
3065@end table
3066
3067@c man end
3068@end ifset
3069
7fb9f789
NC
3070@ifset M68K
3071@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3072
3073@c man begin OPTIONS
3074
3075The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3076when linking for 68K targets.
3077
3078@table @gcctabopt
3079
3080@kindex --got
3081@item --got=@var{type}
3082This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3083@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3084@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3085Info entry for @file{ld}.
3086
3087@end table
3088
3089@c man end
3090@end ifset
3091
833794fc
MR
3092@ifset MIPS
3093@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3094
3095@c man begin OPTIONS
3096
3097The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3098generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3099linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3100
3101@table @gcctabopt
3102
3103@kindex --insn32
3104@item --insn32
3105@kindex --no-insn32
3106@itemx --no-insn32
3107These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3108generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3109or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
311032-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3111used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3112possible.
3113
8b10b0b3
MR
3114@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3115@item --ignore-branch-isa
3116@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3117@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3118These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3119transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3120accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3121is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3122instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3123equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3124calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3125a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3126an error.
3127
833794fc
MR
3128@end table
3129
3130@c man end
3131@end ifset
3132
252b5132
RH
3133@ifset UsesEnvVars
3134@node Environment
3135@section Environment Variables
3136
0285c67d
NC
3137@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3138
560e09e9 3139You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3140@ifclear SingleFormat
3141@code{GNUTARGET},
3142@end ifclear
3143@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3144
36f63dca 3145@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3146@kindex GNUTARGET
3147@cindex default input format
3148@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3149use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3150of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3151@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3152of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3153attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3154this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3155there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3156object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3157BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3158in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3159@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3160
3161@kindex LDEMULATION
3162@cindex default emulation
3163@cindex emulation, default
3164@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3165@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3166behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3167available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3168the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3169variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3170linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3171
3172@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3173@cindex demangling, default
3174Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3175@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3176default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3177a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3178may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3179options.
3180
0285c67d
NC
3181@c man end
3182@end ifset
3183
252b5132
RH
3184@node Scripts
3185@chapter Linker Scripts
3186
3187@cindex scripts
3188@cindex linker scripts
3189@cindex command files
3190Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3191written in the linker command language.
3192
3193The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3194the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3195the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3196more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3197direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3198described below.
3199
3200The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3201yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
a05a5b64
TP
3202linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3203to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
252b5132
RH
3204such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3205
3206You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3207line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3208default linker script.
3209
3210You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3211to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3212Linker Scripts}.
3213
3214@menu
3215* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3216* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3217* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3218* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3219* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3220* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3221* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3222* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3223* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3224* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3225* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3226@end menu
3227
3228@node Basic Script Concepts
3229@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3230@cindex linker script concepts
3231We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3232describe the linker script language.
3233
3234The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3235file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3236@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3237The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3238purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3239among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3240section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3241in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3242
3243Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3244also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3245contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3246the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3247A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3248area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3249loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3250which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3251of debugging information.
3252
3253Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3254first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3255the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3256@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3257section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3258same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3259is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3260(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3261based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3262RAM address would be the VMA.
3263
3264You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3265program with the @samp{-h} option.
3266
3267Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3268@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3269has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3270information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3271will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3272static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3273referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3274
3275You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3276program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3277option.
3278
3279@node Script Format
3280@section Linker Script Format
3281@cindex linker script format
3282Linker scripts are text files.
3283
3284You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3285either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3286symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3287generally ignored.
3288
3289Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3290If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3291otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3292double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3293file name.
3294
3295You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3296@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3297to whitespace.
3298
3299@node Simple Example
3300@section Simple Linker Script Example
3301@cindex linker script example
3302@cindex example of linker script
3303Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3304
3305The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3306@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3307memory layout of the output file.
3308
3309The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3310describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3311code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3312@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3313Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3314your input files.
3315
3316For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
33170x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3318linker script which will do that:
3319@smallexample
3320SECTIONS
3321@{
3322 . = 0x10000;
3323 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3324 . = 0x8000000;
3325 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3326 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3327@}
3328@end smallexample
3329
3330You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3331followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3332descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3333
252b5132
RH
3334The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3335sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3336counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3337other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3338current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3339incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3340@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3341
3342The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3343required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3344after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3345which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3346wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3347means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3348
3349Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3350@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3351@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3352
3353The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3354the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3355at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3356output section, the value of the location counter will be
3357@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3358effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3359immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3360
3361The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3362alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3363example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3364sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3365may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3366sections.
3367
3368That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3369
3370@node Simple Commands
3371@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3372@cindex linker script simple commands
3373In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3374
3375@menu
3376* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3377* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3378@ifclear SingleFormat
3379* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3380@end ifclear
3381
4a93e180 3382* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3383* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3384@end menu
3385
3386@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3387@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3388@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3389@cindex start of execution
3390@cindex first instruction
3391@cindex entry point
3392The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3393point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3394entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3395@smallexample
3396ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3397@end smallexample
3398
3399There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3400entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3401stopping when one of them succeeds:
3402@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3403@item
252b5132 3404the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3405@item
252b5132 3406the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3407@item
3ab904c4
NC
3408the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3409targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3410check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3411@item
252b5132 3412the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3413@item
252b5132
RH
3414The address @code{0}.
3415@end itemize
3416
3417@node File Commands
36f63dca 3418@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3419@cindex linker script file commands
3420Several linker script commands deal with files.
3421
3422@table @code
3423@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3424@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3425@cindex including a linker script
3426Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3427be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3428with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
342910 levels deep.
3430
4006703d
NS
3431You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3432@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3433
252b5132
RH
3434@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3435@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3436@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3437@cindex input files in linker scripts
3438@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3439@cindex linker script input object files
3440The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3441in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3442
3443For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3444a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3445then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3446
3447In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3448script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3449
e3f2db7f
AO
3450In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3451with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3452located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3453for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3454open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3455linker will search through the archive library search path.
3456The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3457as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3458path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
a05a5b64 3459@ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3460
ff5dcc92 3461If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
a05a5b64 3462name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
252b5132
RH
3463@samp{-l}.
3464
3465When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3466files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3467script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3468
3469@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3470@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3471@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3472@cindex grouping input files
3473The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3474files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3475new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
a05a5b64 3476in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3477
b717d30e
JJ
3478@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3479@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3480@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3481This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3482commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3483as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3484with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3485when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3486@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3487and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3488setting afterwards.
3489
252b5132
RH
3490@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3491@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3492@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3493The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3494@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3495@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
a05a5b64 3496Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
252b5132
RH
3497precedence.
3498
3499You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3500output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3501
3502@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3503@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3504@cindex library search path in linker script
3505@cindex archive search path in linker script
3506@cindex search path in linker script
3507The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3508@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132 3509@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
a05a5b64 3510on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
252b5132 3511are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
a05a5b64 3512the command-line option are searched first.
252b5132
RH
3513
3514@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3515@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3516@cindex first input file
3517The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3518that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3519though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3520when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3521first file.
3522@end table
3523
3524@ifclear SingleFormat
3525@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3526@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3527A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3528
3529@table @code
3530@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3531@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3532@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3533@cindex output file format in linker script
3534The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3535output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3536exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3537(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
252b5132
RH
3538line option takes precedence.
3539
3540You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
a05a5b64 3541formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
252b5132
RH
3542This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3543desired endianness.
3544
3545If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3546will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3547output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3548used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3549
3550For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3551command:
3552@smallexample
3553OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3554@end smallexample
3555This says that the default format for the output file is
a05a5b64 3556@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
252b5132
RH
3557option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3558format.
3559
3560@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3561@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3562@cindex input file format in linker script
3563The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3564files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3565This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3566(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
252b5132
RH
3567is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3568command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3569@end table
3570@end ifclear
3571
4a93e180
NC
3572@node REGION_ALIAS
3573@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3574@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3575@cindex region alias
3576@cindex region names
3577
3578Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3579@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3580
3581@smallexample
3582REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3583@end smallexample
3584
3585The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3586memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3587to memory regions. An example follows.
3588
3589Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3590memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3591that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3592non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3593access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3594read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3595sections:
3596
3597@itemize @bullet
3598@item
3599@code{.text} program code;
3600@item
3601@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3602@item
3603@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3604@item
3605@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3606@end itemize
3607
3608The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3609part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3610output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3611systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3612@code{C}:
3613@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3614@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3615@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3616@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3617@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3618@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3619@end multitable
3620The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3621loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3622the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3623the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3624
3625The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3626includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3627memory layout:
3628@smallexample
3629INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3630
3631SECTIONS
3632 @{
3633 .text :
3634 @{
3635 *(.text)
3636 @} > REGION_TEXT
3637 .rodata :
3638 @{
3639 *(.rodata)
3640 rodata_end = .;
3641 @} > REGION_RODATA
3642 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3643 @{
3644 data_start = .;
3645 *(.data)
3646 @} > REGION_DATA
3647 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3648 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3649 .bss :
3650 @{
3651 *(.bss)
3652 @} > REGION_BSS
3653 @}
3654@end smallexample
3655
3656Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3657regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3658variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3659@table @code
3660@item A
3661Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3662@smallexample
3663MEMORY
3664 @{
3665 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3666 @}
3667
3668REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3669REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3670REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3671REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3672@end smallexample
3673@item B
3674Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3675into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3676@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3677@smallexample
3678MEMORY
3679 @{
3680 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3681 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3682 @}
3683
3684REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3685REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3686REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3687REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3688@end smallexample
3689@item C
3690Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3691@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3692initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3693system start into the @code{RAM}.
3694@smallexample
3695MEMORY
3696 @{
3697 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3698 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3699 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3700 @}
3701
3702REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3703REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3704REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3705REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3706@end smallexample
3707@end table
3708
3709It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3710@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3711necessary:
3712@smallexample
3713#include <string.h>
3714
3715extern char data_start [];
3716extern char data_size [];
3717extern char data_load_start [];
3718
3719void copy_data(void)
3720@{
3721 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3722 @{
3723 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3724 @}
3725@}
3726@end smallexample
3727
252b5132 3728@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3729@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3730There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3731
3732@table @code
3733@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3734@kindex ASSERT
3735@cindex assertion in linker script
3736Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3737with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3738
fd1c4238
NC
3739Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3740take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3741inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3742for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3743symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3744
3745@smallexample
3746 .stack :
3747 @{
3748 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3749 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3750 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3751 @}
3752@end smallexample
3753
3754will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3755PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3756can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3757
3758@smallexample
3759 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3760 .stack :
3761 @{
3762 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3763 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3764 @}
3765@end smallexample
3766
3767will work.
3768
252b5132
RH
3769@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3770@kindex EXTERN
3771@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3772Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3773symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3774modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3775each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3776command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3777
3778@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3779@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3780@cindex common allocation in linker script
3781This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3782to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3783output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3784
4818e05f
AM
3785@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3786@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3787@cindex common allocation in linker script
3788This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3789command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3790to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3791
7bdf4127
AB
3792@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3793@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3794@cindex group allocation in linker script
3795@cindex section groups
3796@cindex COMDAT
3797This command has the same effect as the
3798@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3799@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3800and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3801specified (@samp{-r}).
3802
53d25da6
AM
3803@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3804@kindex INSERT
3805@cindex insert user script into default script
3806This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3807augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3808inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3809@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3810default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3811sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3812linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3813insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3814linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3815default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3816of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3817to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3818is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3819
3820@smallexample
3821SECTIONS
3822@{
3823 OVERLAY :
3824 @{
3825 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3826 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3827 @}
3828@}
3829INSERT AFTER .text;
3830@end smallexample
3831
252b5132
RH
3832@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3833@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3834@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3835This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3836references among certain output sections.
3837
3838In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3839using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3840will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3841errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3842a function defined in the other section.
3843
3844The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3845@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3846an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3847@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3848names.
3849
cdf96953
MF
3850@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3851@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3852@cindex cross references
3853This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3854references to one section from a list of other sections.
3855
3856The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3857output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3858a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3859there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3860must never call back.
3861
3862The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3863The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3864If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3865the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3866status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3867names, not input section names.
3868
252b5132
RH
3869@ifclear SingleFormat
3870@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3871@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3872@cindex machine architecture
3873@cindex architecture
3874Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3875of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3876architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3877the @samp{-f} option.
3878@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3879
3880@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3881@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3882This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3883@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3884in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3885@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3886@end table
3887
3888@node Assignments
3889@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3890@cindex assignment in scripts
3891@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3892@cindex variables, defining
3893You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3894the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3895
3896@menu
3897* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3898* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3899* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3900* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3901* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3902@end menu
3903
3904@node Simple Assignments
3905@subsection Simple Assignments
3906
3907You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3908
3909@table @code
3910@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3911@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3912@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3913@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3914@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3915@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3916@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3917@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3918@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3919@end table
3920
3921The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3922@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3923defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3924
3925The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3926may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3927
3928The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3929
3930Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3931
3932You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3933statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3934section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3935
3936The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3937expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3938
3939Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3940assignments may be used:
3941
3942@smallexample
3943floating_point = 0;
3944SECTIONS
3945@{
3946 .text :
3947 @{
3948 *(.text)
3949 _etext = .;
3950 @}
156e34dd 3951 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3952 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3953@}
3954@end smallexample
3955@noindent
3956In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3957zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3958the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3959defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3960upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3961
eb8476a6
MR
3962@node HIDDEN
3963@subsection HIDDEN
3964@cindex HIDDEN
3965For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3966exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3967
3968Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3969@code{HIDDEN}:
3970
3971@smallexample
3972HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3973SECTIONS
3974@{
3975 .text :
3976 @{
3977 *(.text)
3978 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3979 @}
3980 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3981 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3982@}
3983@end smallexample
3984@noindent
3985In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3986
252b5132
RH
3987@node PROVIDE
3988@subsection PROVIDE
3989@cindex PROVIDE
3990In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3991only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3992the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3993@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3994@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3995@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3996@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3997@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3998
3999Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4000@smallexample
4001SECTIONS
4002@{
4003 .text :
4004 @{
4005 *(.text)
4006 _etext = .;
4007 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4008 @}
4009@}
4010@end smallexample
4011
4012In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4013underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4014the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4015underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4016If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4017linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4018
b0daac83
NC
4019Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4020defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4021that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4022when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4023@samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4024
7af8e998
L
4025@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4026@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4027@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4028Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4029hidden and won't be exported.
4030
73ae6183
NC
4031@node Source Code Reference
4032@subsection Source Code Reference
4033
4034Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4035intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4036a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4037symbol that does not have a value.
4038
4039Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4040transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4041stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4042prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4043mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4044of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4045variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4046linker script variable might be referred to as:
4047
4048@smallexample
4049 extern int foo;
4050@end smallexample
4051
4052But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4053
4054@smallexample
4055 _foo = 1000;
4056@end smallexample
4057
4058In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4059transformation has taken place.
4060
4061When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4062things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4063in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4064second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4065table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4066contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4067value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4068
4069@smallexample
4070 int foo = 1000;
4071@end smallexample
4072
10bf6894 4073creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4074holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4075number 1000 is initially stored.
4076
4077When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4078first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4079memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4080So:
4081
4082@smallexample
4083 foo = 1;
4084@end smallexample
4085
4086looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4087associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4088address. Whereas:
4089
4090@smallexample
4091 int * a = & foo;
4092@end smallexample
4093
10bf6894 4094looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4095and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4096the variable @samp{a}.
4097
4098Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4099the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4100an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4101
4102@smallexample
4103 foo = 1000;
4104@end smallexample
4105
4106creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4107the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4108address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4109linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4110access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4111
4112Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4113you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4114use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4115section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4116linker script contains these declarations:
4117
4118@smallexample
4119@group
4120 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4121 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4122 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4123@end group
4124@end smallexample
4125
4126Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4127
4128@smallexample
4129@group
4130 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4131
73ae6183
NC
4132 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4133@end group
4134@end smallexample
4135
4136Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4137Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4138arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4139
4140@smallexample
4141@group
4142 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4143
4144 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4145@end group
4146@end smallexample
4147
4148Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4149operators.
73ae6183 4150
252b5132 4151@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4152@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4153@kindex SECTIONS
4154The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4155into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4156
4157The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4158@smallexample
4159SECTIONS
4160@{
4161 @var{sections-command}
4162 @var{sections-command}
4163 @dots{}
4164@}
4165@end smallexample
4166
4167Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4168
4169@itemize @bullet
4170@item
4171an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4172@item
4173a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4174@item
4175an output section description
4176@item
4177an overlay description
4178@end itemize
4179
4180The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4181@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4182those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4183understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4184the layout of the output file.
4185
4186Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4187below.
4188
4189If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4190linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4191section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4192input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4193example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4194in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4195
4196@menu
4197* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4198* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4199* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4200* Input Section:: Input section description
4201* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4202* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4203* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4204* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4205* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4206@end menu
4207
4208@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4209@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4210The full description of an output section looks like this:
4211@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4212@group
7e7d5768 4213@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4214 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4215 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4216 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4217 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4218 @{
4219 @var{output-section-command}
4220 @var{output-section-command}
4221 @dots{}
abc9061b 4222 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4223@end group
4224@end smallexample
4225
4226Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4227
4228The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4229name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4230The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4231the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4232The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4233
4234Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4235
4236@itemize @bullet
4237@item
4238a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4239@item
4240an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4241@item
4242data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4243@item
4244a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4245@end itemize
4246
4247@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4248@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4249@cindex name, section
4250@cindex section name
4251The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4252meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4253support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4254must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4255example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4256output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4257names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4258quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4259characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4260commas must be quoted.
4261
4262The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4263Discarding}.
4264
4265@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4266@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4267@cindex address, section
4268@cindex section address
4269The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4270address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4271is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4272
4273If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4274section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4275to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4276alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4277contained within the output section.
4278
4279The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4280
4281@itemize @bullet
4282@item
4283If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4284is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4285in that region.
4286
4287@item
4288If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4289regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4290section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4291be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4292
4293@item
4294If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4295the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4296counter.
4297@end itemize
4298
4299@noindent
4300For example:
4301
252b5132
RH
4302@smallexample
4303.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4304@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4305
252b5132
RH
4306@noindent
4307and
ea5cae92 4308
252b5132
RH
4309@smallexample
4310.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4311@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4312
252b5132
RH
4313@noindent
4314are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4315@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4316counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4317counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4318input sections.
252b5132
RH
4319
4320The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4321For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4322so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4323do something like this:
4324@smallexample
4325.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4326@end smallexample
4327@noindent
4328This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4329aligned upward to the specified value.
4330
4331Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4332location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4333sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4334
4335@node Input Section
36f63dca 4336@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4337@cindex input sections
4338@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4339The most common output section command is an input section description.
4340
4341The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4342You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4343in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4344map the input files into your memory layout.
4345
4346@menu
4347* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4348* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4349* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4350* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4351* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4352@end menu
4353
4354@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4355@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4356@cindex input section basics
4357An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4358by a list of section names in parentheses.
4359
4360The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4361describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4362
4363The most common input section description is to include all input
4364sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4365include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4366@smallexample
4367*(.text)
4368@end smallexample
4369@noindent
18625d54 4370Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4371@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4372of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4373match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4374example:
252b5132 4375@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4376EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4377@end smallexample
4378@noindent
4379will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4380and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4381placed inside the section list, for example:
4382@smallexample
b4346c09 4383*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4384@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4385@noindent
4386The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4387two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4388more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4389
4390There are two ways to include more than one section:
4391@smallexample
4392*(.text .rdata)
4393*(.text) *(.rdata)
4394@end smallexample
4395@noindent
4396The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4397@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4398first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4399they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4400@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4401@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4402
8f1732fc
AB
4403When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4404is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4405immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4406@smallexample
4407*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4408@end smallexample
4409@noindent
4410will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4411@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4412from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4413exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4414could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4415@smallexample
4416*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4417@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4418@noindent
4419Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4420before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4421all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4422@smallexample
4423EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4424@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4425
252b5132
RH
4426You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4427You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4428needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4429@smallexample
4430data.o(.data)
4431@end smallexample
4432
ae17ab41
CM
4433To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4434of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4435
4436Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4437
4438@smallexample
4439@group
4440SECTIONS @{
4441 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4442 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4443@}
4444@end group
4445@end smallexample
4446
4447In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4448input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4449@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4450@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4451whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4452
967928e9
AM
4453You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4454matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4455with no whitespace around the colon.
4456
4457@table @samp
4458@item archive:file
4459matches file within archive
4460@item archive:
4461matches the whole archive
4462@item :file
4463matches file but not one in an archive
4464@end table
4465
4466Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4467wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4468single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4469@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4470within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4471also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4472other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4473from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4474command.
4475
252b5132
RH
4476If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4477the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4478commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4479@smallexample
4480data.o
4481@end smallexample
4482
967928e9
AM
4483When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4484and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4485characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4486name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4487did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4488though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4489@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4490the archive search path.
4491
4492@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4493@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4494@cindex input section wildcards
4495@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4496@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4497@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4498In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4499name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4500
4501The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4502pattern for the file name.
4503
4504The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4505
4506@table @samp
4507@item *
4508matches any number of characters
4509@item ?
4510matches any single character
4511@item [@var{chars}]
4512matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4513character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4514@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4515@item \
4516quotes the following character
4517@end table
4518
4519When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4520will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4521Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4522exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4523@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4524a @samp{/} character.
4525
4526File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4527specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4528does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4529
4530If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4531appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4532will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4533sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4534@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4535@smallexample
4536.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4537.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4538@end smallexample
4539
bcaa7b3e 4540@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4541Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4542in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4543this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4544pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4545@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4546into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4547
bcaa7b3e
L
4548@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4549@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4550difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4551descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4552Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4553reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4554
02ecc8e9
L
4555@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4556@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4557difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4558ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4559encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4560
bcaa7b3e
L
4561@cindex SORT
4562@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4563
4564When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4565can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4566
4567@enumerate
4568@item
4569@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4570It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4571sections have the same name.
4572@item
4573@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4574It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4575sections have the same alignment.
4576@item
c0065db7 4577@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4578treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4579@item
4580@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4581is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4582@item
4583All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4584@end enumerate
4585
a05a5b64 4586When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
bcaa7b3e 4587section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
a05a5b64 4588takes precedence over the command-line option.
bcaa7b3e
L
4589
4590If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
a05a5b64 4591command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
bcaa7b3e
L
4592treated as nested sorting command.
4593
4594@enumerate
4595@item
4596@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4597@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4598@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4599@item
4600@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4601@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4602@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4603@end enumerate
4604
4605If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
a05a5b64 4606command-line option will be ignored.
bcaa7b3e 4607
eda680f8 4608@cindex SORT_NONE
a05a5b64 4609@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
eda680f8
L
4610section sorting option.
4611
252b5132
RH
4612If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4613@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4614precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4615
4616This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4617files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4618sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4619The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4620with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4621linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4622@smallexample
4623@group
4624SECTIONS @{
4625 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4626 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4627 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4628 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4629@}
4630@end group
4631@end smallexample
4632
4633@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4634@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4635@cindex common symbol placement
4636@cindex uninitialized data placement
4637A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4638file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4639linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4640named @samp{COMMON}.
4641
4642You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4643other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4644particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4645input files are placed in another section.
4646
4647In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4648@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4649@smallexample
4650.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4651@end smallexample
4652
4653@cindex scommon section
4654@cindex small common symbols
4655Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4656example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4657symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4658different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4659the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4660symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4661to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4662locations.
4663
4664@cindex [COMMON]
4665You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4666notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4667@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4668
4669@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4670@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4671@cindex KEEP
4672@cindex garbage collection
4673When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4674it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4675This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4676with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4677@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4678
4679@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4680@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4681The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4682to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4683start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4684@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4685follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4686@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4687@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4688All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4689files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4690
4691@smallexample
4692@group
4693SECTIONS @{
4694 outputa 0x10000 :
4695 @{
4696 all.o
4697 foo.o (.input1)
4698 @}
36f63dca
NC
4699@end group
4700@group
252b5132
RH
4701 outputb :
4702 @{
4703 foo.o (.input2)
4704 foo1.o (.input1)
4705 @}
36f63dca
NC
4706@end group
4707@group
252b5132
RH
4708 outputc :
4709 @{
4710 *(.input1)
4711 *(.input2)
4712 @}
4713@}
4714@end group
a1ab1d2a 4715@end smallexample
252b5132 4716
cbd0eecf
L
4717If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4718and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4719automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4720__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4721indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4722respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4723C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4724
252b5132 4725@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4726@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4727@cindex data
4728@cindex section data
4729@cindex output section data
4730@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4731@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4732@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4733@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4734@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4735You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4736@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4737an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4738parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4739value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4740counter.
4741
4742The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4743store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4744bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4745stored.
4746
4747For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4748of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4749@smallexample
4750BYTE(1)
4751LONG(addr)
4752@end smallexample
4753
4754When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4755same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4756target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4757@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4758@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4759
4760If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4761which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4762When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4763true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4764endianness of the first input object file.
4765
36f63dca 4766Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4767between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4768@smallexample
4769SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4770@end smallexample
4771whereas this will work:
4772@smallexample
4773SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4774@end smallexample
4775
252b5132
RH
4776@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4777@cindex holes, filling
4778@cindex unspecified memory
4779You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4780current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4781otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4782gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4783with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4784necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4785point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4786than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4787different parts of an output section.
4788
4789This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4790value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4791@smallexample
563e308f 4792FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4793@end smallexample
4794
4795The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4796section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4797part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4798entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4799precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4800expression.
252b5132
RH
4801
4802@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4803@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4804There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4805commands.
4806
4807@table @code
4808@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4809@cindex input filename symbols
4810@cindex filename symbols
4811@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4812The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4813The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4814file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4815the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4816
4817This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4818normally used for any other object file format.
4819
4820@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4821@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4822@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4823@item CONSTRUCTORS
4824When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4825unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4826destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4827arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4828automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4829For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4830linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4831@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4832ignored for other object file formats.
4833
4834The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4835constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4836Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4837the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4838first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4839of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4840compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4841formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4842@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4843the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4844destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4845@code{exit}.
4846
4847For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4848arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4849addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4850and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4851linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4852runtime code expects to see.
4853
4854@smallexample
4855 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4856 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4857 *(.ctors)
4858 LONG(0)
4859 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4860 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4861 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4862 *(.dtors)
4863 LONG(0)
4864 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4865@end smallexample
4866
4867If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4868which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4869are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4870are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4871command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4872@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4873@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4874@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4875
4876Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4877and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4878need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4879scripts.
4880
4881@end table
4882
4883@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4884@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4885@cindex discarding sections
4886@cindex sections, discarding
4887@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4888The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4889This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4890may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4891@smallexample
49c13adb 4892.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4893@end smallexample
4894@noindent
4895will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4896@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4897sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4898space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4899too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4900space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4901@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4902@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4903This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4904
a0976ea4 4905The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4906on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4907symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4908the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4909section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4910
4911@cindex /DISCARD/
4912The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4913input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4914section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4915
4916@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4917@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4918@cindex output section attributes
4919We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4920like this:
0c71d759 4921
252b5132 4922@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4923@group
7e7d5768 4924@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4925 [AT(@var{lma})]
4926 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4927 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4928 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4929 @{
4930 @var{output-section-command}
4931 @var{output-section-command}
4932 @dots{}
562d3460 4933 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4934@end group
4935@end smallexample
0c71d759 4936
252b5132
RH
4937We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4938@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4939remaining section attributes.
4940
a1ab1d2a 4941@menu
252b5132
RH
4942* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4943* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4944* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4945* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4946* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4947* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4948* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4949* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4950@end menu
4951
4952@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4953@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4954Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4955parentheses. The following types are defined:
4956
4957@table @code
4958@item NOLOAD
4959The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4960loaded into memory when the program is run.
4961@item DSECT
4962@itemx COPY
4963@itemx INFO
4964@itemx OVERLAY
4965These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4966rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4967marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4968section when the program is run.
4969@end table
4970
4971@kindex NOLOAD
4972@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4973@cindex loading, preventing
4974The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4975the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4976the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4977@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4978need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4979@smallexample
4980@group
4981SECTIONS @{
4982 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4983 @dots{}
4984@}
4985@end group
4986@end smallexample
4987
4988@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4989@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4990@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4991@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4992@cindex load address
4993@cindex section load address
4994Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4995@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4996@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4997specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4998address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4999
ea5cae92
NC
5000The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5001specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5002takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5003load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5004region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
5005
5006If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
5007section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5008load address:
5009
5010@itemize @bullet
5011@item
5012If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5013the LMA address as well.
5014
5015@item
5016If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5017
5018@item
5019Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5020with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5021section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5022VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5023the last section in the located region.
5024
5025@item
5026If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5027that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5028
5029@item
5030If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5031section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5032@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5033
5034@cindex ROM initialized data
5035@cindex initialized data in ROM
5036This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5037example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5038called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5039@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5040even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5041uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5042defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5043counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5044
5045@smallexample
5046@group
5047SECTIONS
5048 @{
5049 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5050 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5051 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5052 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5053 .bss 0x3000 :
5054 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5055@}
5056@end group
5057@end smallexample
5058
5059The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5060this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5061the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5062how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5063script.
5064
5065@smallexample
5066@group
5067extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5068char *src = &_etext;
5069char *dst = &_data;
5070
ea5cae92
NC
5071/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5072while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5073 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5074
ea5cae92 5075/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5076for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5077 *dst = 0;
5078@end group
5079@end smallexample
5080
bbf115d3
L
5081@node Forced Output Alignment
5082@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5083@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5084@cindex forcing output section alignment
5085@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5086You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5087alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5088intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5089
7e7d5768
AM
5090@node Forced Input Alignment
5091@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5092@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5093@cindex forcing input section alignment
5094@cindex input section alignment
5095You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5096SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5097sections, whether larger or smaller.
5098
0c71d759
NC
5099@node Output Section Constraint
5100@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5101@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5102@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5103@cindex constraints on output sections
5104You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5105of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5106read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5107@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5108
252b5132 5109@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5110@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5111@kindex >@var{region}
5112@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5113@cindex memory regions and sections
5114You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5115using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5116
5117Here is a simple example:
5118@smallexample
5119@group
5120MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5121SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5122@end group
5123@end smallexample
5124
5125@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5126@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5127@kindex :@var{phdr}
5128@cindex section, assigning to program header
5129@cindex program headers and sections
5130You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5131using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5132one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5133assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5134@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5135linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5136
5137Here is a simple example:
5138@smallexample
5139@group
5140PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5141SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5142@end group
5143@end smallexample
5144
5145@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5146@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5147@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5148@cindex section fill pattern
5149@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5150You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5151@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5152(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5153within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5154alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5155necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5156of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5157an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5158fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5159other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5160pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5161expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5162
5163You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5164output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5165
5166Here is a simple example:
5167@smallexample
5168@group
563e308f 5169SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5170@end group
5171@end smallexample
5172
5173@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5174@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5175@kindex OVERLAY
5176@cindex overlays
5177An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5178are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5179the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5180copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5181required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5182can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5183than another.
5184
5185Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5186@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5187output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5188command is as follows:
5189@smallexample
5190@group
5191OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5192 @{
5193 @var{secname1}
5194 @{
5195 @var{output-section-command}
5196 @var{output-section-command}
5197 @dots{}
5198 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5199 @var{secname2}
5200 @{
5201 @var{output-section-command}
5202 @var{output-section-command}
5203 @dots{}
5204 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5205 @dots{}
abc9061b 5206 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5207@end group
5208@end smallexample
5209
5210Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5211section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5212section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5213those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5214except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5215sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5216
abc9061b
CC
5217The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5218the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5219
252b5132
RH
5220The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5221addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5222memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5223whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5224and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5225and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5226
56dd11f0
NC
5227If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5228references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5229the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5230sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5231@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5232
5233For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5234provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5235defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5236@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5237the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5238within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5239symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5240
5241At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5242the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5243
5244Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5245@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5246@smallexample
5247@group
5248 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5249 @{
5250 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5251 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5252 @}
5253@end group
5254@end smallexample
5255@noindent
5256This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5257address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5258@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5259following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5260@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5261@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5262
5263C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5264like the following.
5265
5266@smallexample
5267@group
5268 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5269 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5270 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5271@end group
5272@end smallexample
5273
5274Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5275everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5276example could have been written identically as follows.
5277
5278@smallexample
5279@group
5280 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5281 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5282 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5283 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5284 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5285 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5286 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5287@end group
5288@end smallexample
5289
5290@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5291@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5292@kindex MEMORY
5293@cindex memory regions
5294@cindex regions of memory
5295@cindex allocating memory
5296@cindex discontinuous memory
5297The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5298memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5299
5300The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5301memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5302may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5303can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5304set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5305regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5306around to fit into the available regions.
5307
127fcdff
AB
5308A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5309however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5310specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5311@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5312@smallexample
5313@group
a1ab1d2a 5314MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5315 @{
5316 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5317 @dots{}
5318 @}
5319@end group
5320@end smallexample
5321
5322The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5323region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5324Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5325with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5326must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5327add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5328command.
252b5132
RH
5329
5330@cindex memory region attributes
5331The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5332whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5333not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5334@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5335section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5336the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5337them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5338
5339The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5340@table @samp
5341@item R
5342Read-only section
5343@item W
5344Read/write section
5345@item X
5346Executable section
5347@item A
5348Allocatable section
5349@item I
5350Initialized section
5351@item L
5352Same as @samp{I}
5353@item !
c09e9a8c 5354Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5355@end table
5356
5357If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5358@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5359attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5360in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5361attributes.
5362
5363@kindex ORIGIN =
5364@kindex o =
5365@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5366The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5367the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5368cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5369abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5370@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5371
5372@kindex LENGTH =
5373@kindex len =
5374@kindex l =
5375The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5376region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5377be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5378@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5379
5380In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5381available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5382and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5383linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5384is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5385or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5386explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5387region.
5388
5389@smallexample
5390@group
a1ab1d2a 5391MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5392 @{
5393 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5394 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5395 @}
5396@end group
5397@end smallexample
5398
5399Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5400specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5401@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5402a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5403output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5404was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5405the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5406output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5407region, the linker will issue an error message.
5408
3ec57632 5409It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5410expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5411@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5412
5413@smallexample
5414@group
c0065db7 5415 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5416@end group
5417@end smallexample
5418
252b5132
RH
5419@node PHDRS
5420@section PHDRS Command
5421@kindex PHDRS
5422@cindex program headers
5423@cindex ELF program headers
5424@cindex program segments
5425@cindex segments, ELF
5426The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5427@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5428loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5429program with the @samp{-p} option.
5430
5431When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5432reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5433program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5434This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5435interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5436
5437The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5438in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5439precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5440the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5441not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5442
5443The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5444generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5445ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5446
5447This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5448@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5449
5450@smallexample
5451@group
5452PHDRS
5453@{
5454 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5455 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5456@}
5457@end group
5458@end smallexample
5459
5460The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5461of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5462header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5463with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5464must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5465is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5466
5467Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5468system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5469specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5470sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5471attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5472Section Phdr}.
5473
5474It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5475merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5476repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5477contain the section.
5478
5479If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5480then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5481not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5482convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5483placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5484default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5485segment at all.
5486
5487@kindex FILEHDR
5488@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5489You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5490the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5491The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5492file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5493include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5494segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5495these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5496
5497The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5498value of the keyword.
5499
5500@table @asis
5501@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5502Indicates an unused program header.
5503
5504@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5505Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5506the file.
5507
5508@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5509Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5510
5511@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5512Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5513found.
5514
5515@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5516Indicates a segment holding note information.
5517
5518@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5519A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5520ABI.
5521
5522@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5523Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5524
1a9ccd70
NC
5525@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5526Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5527
252b5132
RH
5528@item @var{expression}
5529An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5530be used for types not defined above.
5531@end table
5532
5533You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5534in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5535@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5536Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5537output section attribute.
5538
5539The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5540which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5541explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5542an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5543header.
5544
5545Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5546headers used on a native ELF system.
5547
5548@example
5549@group
5550PHDRS
5551@{
5552 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5553 interp PT_INTERP ;
5554 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5555 data PT_LOAD ;
5556 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5557@}
5558
5559SECTIONS
5560@{
5561 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5562 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5563 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5564 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5565 @dots{}
5566 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5567 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5568 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5569 @dots{}
5570@}
5571@end group
5572@end example
5573
5574@node VERSION
5575@section VERSION Command
5576@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5577@cindex symbol versions
5578@cindex version script
5579@cindex versions of symbols
5580The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5581only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5582symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5583a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5584shared library.
5585
5586You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5587you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5588also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5589
5590The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5591@smallexample
5592VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5593@end smallexample
5594
5595The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5596Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5597version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5598version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5599version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5600scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5601library.
5602
5603The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5604examples.
5605
5606@smallexample
5607VERS_1.1 @{
5608 global:
5609 foo1;
5610 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5611 old*;
5612 original*;
5613 new*;
252b5132
RH
5614@};
5615
5616VERS_1.2 @{
5617 foo2;
5618@} VERS_1.1;
5619
5620VERS_2.0 @{
5621 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5622 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5623 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5624 "f(int, double)";
5625 @};
252b5132
RH
5626@} VERS_1.2;
5627@end smallexample
5628
5629This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5630version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5631The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5632a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5633of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5634symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5635is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5636in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5637However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5638name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5639
5640Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5641depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5642to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5643
5644Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5645depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5646and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5647
5648When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5649specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5650unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5651unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5652somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5653wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5654wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5655set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5656ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5657
5658The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5659they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5660could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5661However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5662
0f6bf451 5663Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5664in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5665symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5666won't.
5667
5668@smallexample
7c9c73be 5669@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5670@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5671
252b5132
RH
5672When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5673symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5674requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5675shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5676loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5677linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5678application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5679way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5680all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5681search for each symbol reference.
5682
5683The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5684doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5685that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5686functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5687the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5688required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5689that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5690versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5691the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5692
5693There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5694first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5695source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5696script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5697maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5698@smallexample
5699__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5700@end smallexample
5701@noindent
5702in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5703be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5704The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5705@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5706takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5707
5708The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5709function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5710an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5711version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5712linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5713
5714To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5715source file. Here is an example:
5716
5717@smallexample
5718__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5719__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5720__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5721__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5722@end smallexample
5723
5724In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5725unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5726example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5727@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5728
5729When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5730some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5731this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5732@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5733declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5734you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5735
5736If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5737within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5738(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5739specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5740
cb840a31
L
5741You can also specify the language in the version script:
5742
5743@smallexample
5744VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5745@end smallexample
5746
c0065db7 5747The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5748The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5749demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5750patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5751@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5752
86043bbb
MM
5753Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5754described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5755or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5756the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5757whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5758cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5759might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5760should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5761expect when you upgrade.
5762
252b5132
RH
5763@node Expressions
5764@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5765@cindex expressions
5766@cindex arithmetic
5767The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5768that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5769expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5770host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5771
5772You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5773
5774The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5775expressions.
5776
5777@menu
5778* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5779* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5780* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5781* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5782* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5783* Operators:: Operators
5784* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5785* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5786* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5787@end menu
5788
5789@node Constants
5790@subsection Constants
5791@cindex integer notation
5792@cindex constants in linker scripts
5793All constants are integers.
5794
5795As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5796octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5797hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5798@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5799@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5800value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5801
5802@cindex scaled integers
5803@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5804@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5805@cindex suffixes for integers
5806@cindex integer suffixes
5807In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5808constant by
5809@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5810@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5811@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5812@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5813@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5814@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5815@tex
5816${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5817@end tex
5818@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5819respectively. For example, the following
5820all refer to the same quantity:
5821
252b5132 5822@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5823_fourk_1 = 4K;
5824_fourk_2 = 4096;
5825_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5826_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5827@end smallexample
5828
8a308ae8
NC
5829Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5830conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5831
0c71d759
NC
5832@node Symbolic Constants
5833@subsection Symbolic Constants
5834@cindex symbolic constants
5835@kindex CONSTANT
5836It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5837the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5838
5839@table @code
5840@item MAXPAGESIZE
5841@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5842The target's maximum page size.
5843
5844@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5845@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5846The target's default page size.
5847@end table
5848
5849So for example:
5850
5851@smallexample
9d5777a3 5852 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5853@end smallexample
5854
5855will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5856supported by the target.
5857
252b5132
RH
5858@node Symbols
5859@subsection Symbol Names
5860@cindex symbol names
5861@cindex names
5862@cindex quoted symbol names
5863@kindex "
5864Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5865and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5866Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5867specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5868keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5869@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5870"SECTION" = 9;
5871"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5872@end smallexample
5873
5874Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5875to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5876whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5877
ecca9871
L
5878@node Orphan Sections
5879@subsection Orphan Sections
5880@cindex orphan
5881Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5882are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5883script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5884output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5885in which to place the orphaned input section.
5886
5887If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5888an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5889placed at the end of that output section.
5890
5891If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5892sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5893name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5894orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5895one new output section.
5896
5897If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5898then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5899in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5900linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5901attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5902sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5903support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5904
a05a5b64
TP
5905The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5906(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
c005eb9e
AB
5907output sections an orphan is placed in.
5908
252b5132
RH
5909@node Location Counter
5910@subsection The Location Counter
5911@kindex .
5912@cindex dot
5913@cindex location counter
5914@cindex current output location
5915The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5916current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5917location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5918within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5919anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5920
5921@cindex holes
5922Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5923moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5924location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5925and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5926doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5927
5928@smallexample
5929SECTIONS
5930@{
5931 output :
5932 @{
5933 file1(.text)
5934 . = . + 1000;
5935 file2(.text)
5936 . += 1000;
5937 file3(.text)
563e308f 5938 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5939@}
5940@end smallexample
5941@noindent
5942In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5943located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5944followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5945@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5946@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5947specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5948
5c6bbab8
NC
5949@cindex dot inside sections
5950Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5951current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5952statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5953absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5954however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5955not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5956
5957@smallexample
5958SECTIONS
5959@{
5960 . = 0x100
5961 .text: @{
5962 *(.text)
5963 . = 0x200
5964 @}
5965 . = 0x500
5966 .data: @{
5967 *(.data)
5968 . += 0x600
5969 @}
5970@}
5971@end smallexample
5972
5973The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5974and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5975the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5976much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5977move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5978and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5979the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5980the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5981
b5666f2f
AM
5982@cindex dot outside sections
5983Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5984output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5985needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5986
5987@smallexample
5988SECTIONS
5989@{
5990 start_of_text = . ;
5991 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5992 end_of_text = . ;
5993
5994 start_of_data = . ;
5995 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5996 end_of_data = . ;
5997@}
5998@end smallexample
5999
6000If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6001not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6002between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6003should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6004blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6005the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6006sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6007statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6008special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6009place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6010as follows:
6011
6012@smallexample
6013SECTIONS
6014@{
6015 start_of_text = . ;
6016 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6017 end_of_text = . ;
6018
6019 start_of_data = . ;
6020 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6021 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6022 end_of_data = . ;
6023@}
6024@end smallexample
6025
6026This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6027@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6028placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6029assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6030a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6031section. So you could write:
6032
6033@smallexample
6034SECTIONS
6035@{
6036 start_of_text = . ;
6037 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6038 end_of_text = . ;
6039
6040 . = . ;
6041 start_of_data = . ;
6042 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6043 end_of_data = . ;
6044@}
6045@end smallexample
6046
6047Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6048@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6049
252b5132
RH
6050@need 2000
6051@node Operators
6052@subsection Operators
6053@cindex operators for arithmetic
6054@cindex arithmetic operators
6055@cindex precedence in expressions
6056The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6057the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6058@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6059@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6060@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6061@smallexample
6062precedence associativity Operators Notes
6063(highest)
60641 left ! - ~ (1)
60652 left * / %
60663 left + -
60674 left >> <<
60685 left == != > < <= >=
60696 left &
60707 left |
60718 left &&
60729 left ||
607310 right ? :
607411 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6075(lowest)
6076@end smallexample
6077Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6078(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6079(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6080@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6081@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6082@tex
6083\vskip \baselineskip
6084%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6085\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6086\hrule
6087\halign
6088{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6089height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6090&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6091height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6092\noalign{\hrule}
6093height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6094&highest&&&&&\cr
6095% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6096&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6097&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6098&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6099&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6100&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6101&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6102&7&&left&&|&\cr
6103&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6104&9&&left&&||&\cr
6105&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6106&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6107&lowest&&&&&\cr
6108height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6109\hrule}
6110@end tex
6111@iftex
6112{
6113@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6114@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6115@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6116}
6117@end iftex
6118@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6119
6120@node Evaluation
6121@subsection Evaluation
6122@cindex lazy evaluation
6123@cindex expression evaluation order
6124The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6125an expression when absolutely necessary.
6126
6127The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6128address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6129regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6130as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6131
6132However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6133until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6134other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6135for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6136
6137The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6138assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6139allocation.
6140
6141Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6142@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6143
6144If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6145available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6146following
6147@smallexample
6148@group
6149SECTIONS
6150 @{
a1ab1d2a 6151 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6152 @{ *(.text) @}
6153 @}
6154@end group
6155@end smallexample
6156@noindent
6157will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6158address}.
6159
6160@node Expression Section
6161@subsection The Section of an Expression
6162@cindex expression sections
6163@cindex absolute expressions
6164@cindex relative expressions
6165@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6166@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6167@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6168Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6169relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6170using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6171value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6172symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6173operations.
6174
abf4be64
AM
6175Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6176section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6177address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6178@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6179functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6180One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6181(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6182differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6183versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6184section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6185Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6186absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6187given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6188everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6189
6190In the following simple example,
252b5132 6191
7542af2a
AM
6192@smallexample
6193@group
6194SECTIONS
6195 @{
6196 . = 0x100;
6197 __executable_start = 0x100;
6198 .data :
6199 @{
6200 . = 0x10;
6201 __data_start = 0x10;
6202 *(.data)
6203 @}
6204 @dots{}
6205 @}
6206@end group
6207@end smallexample
252b5132 6208
7542af2a
AM
6209both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6210address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6211@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6212section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6213
5c3049d2
AM
6214For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6215addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6216
6217@itemize @bullet
6218@item
c05f749e
AM
6219Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6220operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6221absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6222@item
7542af2a
AM
6223Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6224relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6225and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6226@item
c05f749e
AM
6227Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6228in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6229address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6230before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6231@end itemize
6232
6233The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6234
6235@itemize @bullet
6236@item
6237An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6238@item
6239The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6240@item
9bc8bb33 6241The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6242relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6243(after above conversions) is also a number when
6244@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6245but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6246@item
6247The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6248relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6249section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6250@item
6251The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6252conversions) is an absolute address.
6253@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6254
6255You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6256to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6257create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6258section @samp{.data}:
6259@smallexample
6260SECTIONS
6261 @{
6262 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6263 @}
6264@end smallexample
6265@noindent
6266If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6267@samp{.data} section.
6268
7542af2a
AM
6269Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6270particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6271
252b5132
RH
6272@node Builtin Functions
6273@subsection Builtin Functions
6274@cindex functions in expressions
6275The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6276use in linker script expressions.
6277
6278@table @code
6279@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6280@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6281@cindex expression, absolute
6282Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6283of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6284value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6285normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6286
6287@item ADDR(@var{section})
6288@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6289@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6290Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6291script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6292the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6293@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6294@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6295the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6296@smallexample
6297@group
6298SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6299 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6300 @{
252b5132
RH
6301 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6302 @dots{}
6303 @}
6304 .output :
6305 @{
6306 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6307 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6308 @}
6309@dots{} @}
6310@end group
6311@end smallexample
6312
876f4090
NS
6313@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6314@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6315@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6316@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6317@cindex round up location counter
6318@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6319@cindex round up expression
6320@cindex align expression
6321Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6322to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6323doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6324arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6325expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6326equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6327
6328Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6329next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6330variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6331input sections:
252b5132
RH
6332@smallexample
6333@group
6334SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6335 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6336 *(.data)
6337 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6338 @}
6339@dots{} @}
6340@end group
6341@end smallexample
6342@noindent
6343The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6344a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6345a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6346of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6347
6348The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6349
362c1d1a
NS
6350@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6351@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6352@cindex section alignment
6353Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6354been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6355evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6356the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6357value in that section.
6358@smallexample
6359@group
6360SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6361 .output @{
6362 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6363 @dots{}
6364 @}
6365@dots{} @}
6366@end group
6367@end smallexample
6368
252b5132
RH
6369@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6370@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6371This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6372scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6373section.
6374
2d20f7bf
JJ
6375@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6376@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6377This is equivalent to either
6378@smallexample
6379(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6380@end smallexample
6381or
6382@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6383(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6384 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6385@end smallexample
6386@noindent
6387depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6388for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6389@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6390If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6391memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6392bytes in the on-disk file.
6393
6394This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6395any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6396@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
def5c83c
AM
6397be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6398running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6399that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6400page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
2d20f7bf
JJ
6401
6402@noindent
6403Example:
6404@smallexample
6405 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6406@end smallexample
6407
6408@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6409@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6410This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6411evaluation purposes.
6412
6413@smallexample
6414 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6415@end smallexample
6416
a4f5ad88
JJ
6417@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6418@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6419This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6420@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6421When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6422does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
def5c83c
AM
6423@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6424argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6425script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6426@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6427padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6428section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6429
6430@smallexample
6431 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6432@end smallexample
6433
252b5132
RH
6434@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6435@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6436@cindex symbol defaults
6437Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6438defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6439return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6440default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6441shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6442the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6443existed, its value is preserved:
6444
6445@smallexample
6446@group
6447SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6448 .text : @{
6449 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6450 @dots{}
6451 @}
6452 @dots{}
6453@}
6454@end group
6455@end smallexample
6456
3ec57632
NC
6457@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6458@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6459Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6460
252b5132
RH
6461@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6462@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6463@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6464Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6465Section LMA}).
6466
2e53f7d6
NC
6467@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6468@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6469Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6470@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6471
252b5132
RH
6472@kindex MAX
6473@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6474Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6475
6476@kindex MIN
6477@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6478Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6479
6480@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6481@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6482@cindex unallocated address, next
6483Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6484This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6485use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6486output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6487
3ec57632
NC
6488@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6489@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6490Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6491
ba916c8a
MM
6492@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6493@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6494Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6495value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6496@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6497will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6498can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6499``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6500name.
6501
252b5132
RH
6502@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6503@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6504@cindex section size
6505Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6506been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6507evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6508@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6509@smallexample
6510@group
6511SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6512 .output @{
6513 .start = . ;
6514 @dots{}
6515 .end = . ;
6516 @}
6517 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6518 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6519@dots{} @}
6520@end group
6521@end smallexample
6522
6523@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6524@itemx sizeof_headers
6525@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6526@cindex header size
6527Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6528information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6529this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6530choose, to facilitate paging.
6531
6532@cindex not enough room for program headers
6533@cindex program headers, not enough room
6534When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6535@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6536number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6537addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6538additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6539room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6540the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6541script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6542you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6543command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6544@end table
6545
6546@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6547@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6548@cindex implicit linker scripts
6549If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6550an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6551linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6552linker will report an error.
6553
6554An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6555
6556Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6557assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6558commands.
6559
6560Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6561at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6562read. This can affect archive searching.
6563
6564@ifset GENERIC
6565@node Machine Dependent
6566@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6567
6568@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6569@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6570sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6571functionality are not listed.
6572
6573@menu
36f63dca
NC
6574@ifset H8300
6575* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6576@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6577@ifset M68HC11
6578* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6579@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6580@ifset ARM
6581* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6582@end ifset
6583@ifset HPPA
6584* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6585@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6586@ifset M68K
6587* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6588@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6589@ifset MIPS
6590* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6591@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6592@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6593* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6594@end ifset
2469cfa2 6595@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6596* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6597@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6598@ifset NDS32
6599* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6600@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6601@ifset NIOSII
6602* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6603@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6604@ifset POWERPC
6605* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6606@end ifset
6607@ifset POWERPC64
6608* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6609@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6610@ifset S/390
6611* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6612@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6613@ifset SPU
6614* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6615@end ifset
74459f0e 6616@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6617* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6618@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6619@ifset WIN32
6620* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6621@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6622@ifset XTENSA
6623* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6624@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6625@end menu
6626@end ifset
6627
252b5132
RH
6628@ifset H8300
6629@ifclear GENERIC
6630@raisesections
6631@end ifclear
6632
6633@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6634@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6635
6636@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6637For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6638you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6639
6640@table @emph
6641@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6642@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6643@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6644targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6645program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6646respectively.
6647
6648@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6649@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6650@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6651@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6652sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6653page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6654(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6655@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6656top page of memory).
1502569c 6657
81f5558e
NC
6658@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6659indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6660displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6661the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6662@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6663whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6664range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6665
1502569c 6666@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6667@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6668biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6669which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6670page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6671(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6672@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6673the top page of memory).
6674
6675@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6676@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
667732 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6678changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6679(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6680@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6681the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6682@end table
6683
6684@ifclear GENERIC
6685@lowersections
6686@end ifclear
6687@end ifset
6688
36f63dca 6689@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6690@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6691@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6692@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6693@node Renesas
6694@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6695
c2dcd04e
NC
6696@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6697H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6698options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6699@end ifset
6700@end ifclear
6701
36f63dca
NC
6702@ifset ARM
6703@ifclear GENERIC
6704@raisesections
6705@end ifclear
6706
93fd0973
SC
6707@ifset M68HC11
6708@ifclear GENERIC
6709@raisesections
6710@end ifclear
6711
6712@node M68HC11/68HC12
6713@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6714
6715@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6716
6717@subsection Linker Relaxation
6718
6719For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6720optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6721
6722@table @emph
6723@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6724@item relaxing address modes
6725@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6726targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6727program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6728respectively.
6729
6730@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6731transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6732page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6733
6734@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6735When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6736of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6737addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6738@code{bset} instructions.
6739
6740@end table
6741
6742@subsection Trampoline Generation
6743
6744@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6745@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6746For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6747call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6748will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6749trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6750case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6751point to the function trampoline.
6752
6753@ifclear GENERIC
6754@lowersections
6755@end ifclear
6756@end ifset
6757
36f63dca 6758@node ARM
3674e28a 6759@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6760
6761@cindex ARM interworking support
6762@kindex --support-old-code
6763For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6764between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6765been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6766line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6767libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
a05a5b64 6768option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
36f63dca
NC
6769given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6770which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6771the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6772non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6773
6774@cindex thumb entry point
6775@cindex entry point, thumb
6776@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6777The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6778@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6779But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6780branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6781executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6782
ce11ba6c
KT
6783@cindex PE import table prefixing
6784@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6785The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6786the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6787element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6788import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6789
e489d0ae
PB
6790@cindex BE8
6791@kindex --be8
6792The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6793executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6794objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6795option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6796little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6797
3674e28a
PB
6798@cindex TARGET1
6799@kindex --target1-rel
6800@kindex --target1-abs
6801The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6802@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6803or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6804and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6805
6806@cindex TARGET2
6807@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6808The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6809@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6810meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6811@table @samp
6812@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6813@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6814@item abs
6815@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6816@item got-rel
6817@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6818@end table
6819
319850b4
JB
6820@cindex FIX_V4BX
6821@kindex --fix-v4bx
6822The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6823specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6824interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6825also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6826
6827In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6828linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6829@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6830
6831In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6832relocations are ignored.
6833
845b51d6
PB
6834@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6835@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6836Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6837relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6838
6839@smallexample
6840TST rM, #1
6841MOVEQ PC, rM
6842BX Rn
6843@end smallexample
6844
6845This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6846and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6847condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6848
33bfe774
JB
6849@cindex USE_BLX
6850@kindex --use-blx
6851The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6852BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6853situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6854code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6855each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6856
6857This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6858specify it if you are using that target.
6859
c6dd86c6
JB
6860@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6861@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6862The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6863bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6864instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6865to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6866the support code can read the intended values.
6867
6868The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6869intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6870and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6871intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6872full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6873you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6874
6875If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6876enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6877@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6878mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6879vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6880@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6881
6882If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6883potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6884such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6885first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6886instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6887the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6888are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6889
2de70689
MGD
6890@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6891@kindex --fix-arm1176
6892@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6893The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6894in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6895are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6896unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6897
9d5777a3 6898Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6899Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6900http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6901
a504d23a
LA
6902@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6903@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6904
6905The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6906workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6907the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6908off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6909the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6910core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6911integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6912VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6913
6914The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6915necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6916
6917The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6918@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6919STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6920linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6921@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6922
6923If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6924potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6925such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6926replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6927branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6928then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6929
6930The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6931the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6932
6933The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6934they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6935there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6936occurs.
6937
6938The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6939PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6940large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6941cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6942occurs.
6943
bf21ed78
MS
6944@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6945@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6946The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6947warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6948enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6949linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6950using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6951not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6952
6953@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6954@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6955The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6956warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6957@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6958linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6959using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6960
726150b7
NC
6961@cindex PIC_VENEER
6962@kindex --pic-veneer
6963The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6964ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6965is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6966@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6967
6968@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6969@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6970The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6971code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6972perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6973placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
a05a5b64 6974controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
726150b7 6975The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6976duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6977group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6978code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6979where they should be placed.
6980
6981The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6982@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6983placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6984branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6985placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6986value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6987exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6988A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6989linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6990from the input sections.
6991
6992The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6993@samp{N = +1}.
6994
1a51c1a4
NC
6995Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6996only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6997otherwise.
6998
1db37fe6
YG
6999@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7000@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7001@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7002The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7003
7004The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7005
68fcca92
JW
7006@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7007@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7008@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7009The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7010
7011Please contact ARM for further details.
7012
1db37fe6
YG
7013@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7014@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7015@cindex Merging exidx entries
7016The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7017
7018@kindex --long-plt
7019@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7020The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7021which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7022entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7023
1f56df9d
JW
7024@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7025@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7026The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7027link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7028
4ba2ef8f
TP
7029@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7030All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
a05a5b64 7031Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
4ba2ef8f
TP
7032@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7033veneers in memory.
7034
54ddd295
TP
7035@kindex --cmse-implib
7036@cindex Secure gateway import library
7037The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7038specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7039secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7040executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7041
0955507f
TP
7042@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7043@cindex Input import library
7044The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7045must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7046given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7047in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7048@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7049library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7050library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7051for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7052specified.
7053
36f63dca
NC
7054@ifclear GENERIC
7055@lowersections
7056@end ifclear
7057@end ifset
7058
7059@ifset HPPA
7060@ifclear GENERIC
7061@raisesections
7062@end ifclear
7063
7064@node HPPA ELF32
7065@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7066@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7067@kindex --multi-subspace
7068When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7069import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7070The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7071stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7072multiple sub-spaces.
7073
7074@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7075@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7076Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7077stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7078@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7079sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7080a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7081the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7082conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7083prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7084A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7085branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7086@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7087@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7088detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7089positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7090
7091Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7092single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7093create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7094large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7095
7096@ifclear GENERIC
7097@lowersections
7098@end ifclear
7099@end ifset
7100
7fb9f789
NC
7101@ifset M68K
7102@ifclear GENERIC
7103@raisesections
7104@end ifclear
7105
7106@node M68K
7107@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7108
7109@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7110@kindex --got=@var{type}
7111The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7112The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7113@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7114the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7115@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7116entries only at non-negative offsets.
7117@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7118entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7119support such GOTs.
7120@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7121output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7122file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7123files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7124
7125@ifclear GENERIC
7126@lowersections
7127@end ifclear
7128@end ifset
7129
833794fc
MR
7130@ifset MIPS
7131@ifclear GENERIC
7132@raisesections
7133@end ifclear
7134
7135@node MIPS
7136@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7137
7138@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7139@kindex --insn32
7140@kindex --no-insn32
7141The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7142microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7143in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7144used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7145or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7146including 16-bit ones where possible.
7147
8b10b0b3
MR
7148@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7149@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7150@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7151The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7152control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7153@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7154relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7155calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7156relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7157instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7158or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7159the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7160
833794fc
MR
7161@ifclear GENERIC
7162@lowersections
7163@end ifclear
7164@end ifset
7165
36f63dca
NC
7166@ifset MMIX
7167@ifclear GENERIC
7168@raisesections
7169@end ifclear
7170
7171@node MMIX
7172@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7173For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7174@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7175understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7176can translate between the two formats.
7177
7178There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7179Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7180registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7181equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7182@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7183global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7184this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7185symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7186
7a2de473
HPN
7187Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7188@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7189The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7190of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7191
7192Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7193are left out from an mmo file.
7194
7195@ifclear GENERIC
7196@lowersections
7197@end ifclear
7198@end ifset
7199
7200@ifset MSP430
7201@ifclear GENERIC
7202@raisesections
7203@end ifclear
7204
7205@node MSP430
7206@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7207For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7208will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7209just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7210
7211@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7212The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7213
7214@table @code
7215@item @samp{.vectors}
7216Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7217
7218@item @samp{.bootloader}
7219Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7220in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7221
7222@item @samp{.infomem}
7223Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7224this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7225
c0065db7 7226@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7227This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7228in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7229
7230@item @samp{.noinit}
7231Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7232
c0065db7 7233The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7234@end table
7235
7ef3addb
JL
7236@table @option
7237@cindex MSP430 Options
7238@kindex --code-region
7239@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7240This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7241argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7242using this option.
7243
7244@kindex --data-region
7245@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7246This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7247[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7248for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7249
7250@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7251@item --disable-sec-transformation
7252Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7253and @code{--data-region} options.
7254This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7255wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7256not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7257@end table
7258
36f63dca
NC
7259@ifclear GENERIC
7260@lowersections
7261@end ifclear
7262@end ifset
7263
35c08157
KLC
7264@ifset NDS32
7265@ifclear GENERIC
7266@raisesections
7267@end ifclear
7268
7269@node NDS32
7270@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7271@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7272For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7273relaxes objects according to these options.
7274
7275@table @code
7276@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7277Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7278
7279@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7280Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7281
7282@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7283Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7284
7285@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7286Export the EX9 table after linking.
7287
7288@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7289Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7290
7291@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7292Update the existing EX9 table.
7293
7294@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7295Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7296
7297@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7298Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7299
7300@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7301Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7302
7303@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7304Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7305@end table
7306
7307@ifclear GENERIC
7308@lowersections
7309@end ifclear
7310@end ifset
7311
78058a5e
SL
7312@ifset NIOSII
7313@ifclear GENERIC
7314@raisesections
7315@end ifclear
7316
7317@node Nios II
7318@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7319@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7320@kindex --relax on Nios II
7321
7322Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7323transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7324which may result in @command{ld} giving
7325@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7326The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7327trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7328outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7329trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7330be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7331larger than 256MB.
7332
7333The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7334is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7335@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7336locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7337source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7338register as a temporary.
7339
7340Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7341relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7342option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7343
7344@ifclear GENERIC
7345@lowersections
7346@end ifclear
7347@end ifset
7348
2a60a7a8
AM
7349@ifset POWERPC
7350@ifclear GENERIC
7351@raisesections
7352@end ifclear
7353
7354@node PowerPC ELF32
7355@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7356@cindex PowerPC long branches
7357@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7358Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7359displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7360@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7361@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7362the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7363section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7364section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7365@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7366both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7367considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7368
7369@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7370@table @option
7371@cindex PowerPC PLT
7372@kindex --bss-plt
7373@item --bss-plt
7374Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7375generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7376the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7377writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7378@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7379PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7380compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7381BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7382
016687f8
AM
7383@kindex --secure-plt
7384@item --secure-plt
7385@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7386@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7387when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7388layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7389style BSS PLT.
7390
2a60a7a8
AM
7391@cindex PowerPC GOT
7392@kindex --sdata-got
7393@item --sdata-got
7394The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7395sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7396@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7397section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7398@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7399@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7400@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7401@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7402PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7403pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7404GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7405really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7406
7407@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7408@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7409@item --emit-stub-syms
7410This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7411symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7412
7413@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7414@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7415@item --no-tls-optimize
7416PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7417sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7418disable the optimization.
7419@end table
7420
7421@ifclear GENERIC
7422@lowersections
7423@end ifclear
7424@end ifset
7425
7426@ifset POWERPC64
7427@ifclear GENERIC
7428@raisesections
7429@end ifclear
7430
7431@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7432@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7433
7434@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7435@table @option
7436@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7437@kindex --stub-group-size
7438@item --stub-group-size
7439Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7440by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7441@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7442sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7443a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7444the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7445conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7446prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7447A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7448branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7449@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7450@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7451detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7452positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7453
7454Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7455single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7456create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7457large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7458
7459@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7460@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7461@item --emit-stub-syms
7462This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7463symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7464
7465@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7466@kindex --dotsyms
7467@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7468@item --dotsyms
7469@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7470These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7471in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7472function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7473code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7474properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7475to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7476@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7477dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7478feature.
7479
7ae4ea7d
AM
7480@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7481@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7482@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7483@item --save-restore-funcs
7484@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7485These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7486provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7487@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7488function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7489link.
7490
2a60a7a8
AM
7491@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7492@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7493@item --no-tls-optimize
7494PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7495sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7496disable the optimization.
7497
7c9cf415
AM
7498@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7499@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7500@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7501@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7502@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7503These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7504stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7505an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7506@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7507stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7508option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7509Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7510slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7511application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7512normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7513
2a60a7a8
AM
7514@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7515@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7516@item --no-opd-optimize
7517PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7518corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7519the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7520Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7521
7522@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7523@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7524@item --non-overlapping-opd
7525Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7526@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7527the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7528entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7529
7530@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7531@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7532@item --no-toc-optimize
7533PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7534entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7535reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7536marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7537marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7538relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7539unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7540reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7541discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7542reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7543code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7544optimization.
7545
7546@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7547@kindex --no-multi-toc
7548@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7549If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7550@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7551where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7552entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7553total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7554grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7555TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7556calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7557help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
755864K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7559Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7560
7561@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7562@kindex --no-toc-sort
7563@item --no-toc-sort
7564By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7565happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7566placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7567with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7568referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7569@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7570results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7571off this feature.
7572
7573@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7574@kindex --plt-align
7575@kindex --no-plt-align
7576@item --plt-align
7577@itemx --no-plt-align
7578Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
2420fff6
AM
7579aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7580boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7581specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7582specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7583if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7584PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
794e51c0
AM
7585
7586@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7587@kindex --plt-static-chain
7588@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7589@item --plt-static-chain
7590@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7591Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7592chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7593chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7594
7595@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7596@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7597@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7598@item --plt-thread-safe
1be5d8d3 7599@itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
794e51c0
AM
7600With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7601lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7602another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7603order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7604memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7605barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7606looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7607seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7608default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7609
7610@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7611@kindex --plt-localentry
7612@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7613@item --plt-localentry
7614@itemx --no-localentry
7615ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7616ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7617(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7618Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7619or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7620functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7621in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7622interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7623including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7624to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7625complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7626care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7627@end table
7628
7629@ifclear GENERIC
7630@lowersections
7631@end ifclear
7632@end ifset
7633
b4cbbe8f
AK
7634@ifset S/390
7635@ifclear GENERIC
7636@raisesections
7637@end ifclear
7638
7639@node S/390 ELF
7640@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7641
7642@cindex S/390 ELF options
7643@table @option
7644
7645@cindex S/390
7646@kindex --s390-pgste
7647@item --s390-pgste
7648This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7649segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7650binaries marked that way.
7651@end table
7652
7653@ifclear GENERIC
7654@lowersections
7655@end ifclear
7656@end ifset
7657
49fa1e15
AM
7658@ifset SPU
7659@ifclear GENERIC
7660@raisesections
7661@end ifclear
7662
7663@node SPU ELF
7664@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7665
7666@cindex SPU ELF options
7667@table @option
7668
7669@cindex SPU plugins
7670@kindex --plugin
7671@item --plugin
7672This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7673
7674@cindex SPU overlays
7675@kindex --no-overlays
7676@item --no-overlays
7677Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7678regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7679@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7680turns off all this special overlay handling.
7681
7682@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7683@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7684@item --emit-stub-syms
7685This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7686symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7687
7688@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7689@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7690@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7691This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7692function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7693on calls to non-overlay regions.
7694
7695@cindex SPU local store size
7696@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7697@item --local-store=lo:hi
7698@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7699the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7700range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7701
c0065db7 7702@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7703@kindex --stack-analysis
7704@item --stack-analysis
7705SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7706unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7707under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7708@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7709@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7710determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7711for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7712for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7713for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7714find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7715and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7716under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7717dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7718is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7719and calls will be given.
7720
c0065db7 7721@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7722@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7723@item --emit-stack-syms
7724This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7725in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7726These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7727functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7728functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7729such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7730The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7731@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7732@end table
7733
7734@ifclear GENERIC
7735@lowersections
7736@end ifclear
7737@end ifset
7738
36f63dca
NC
7739@ifset TICOFF
7740@ifclear GENERIC
7741@raisesections
7742@end ifclear
7743
7744@node TI COFF
7745@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7746@cindex TI COFF versions
7747@kindex --format=@var{version}
7748The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7749TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7750also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7751format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7752header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7753
7754@ifclear GENERIC
7755@lowersections
7756@end ifclear
7757@end ifset
7758
2ca22b03
NC
7759@ifset WIN32
7760@ifclear GENERIC
7761@raisesections
7762@end ifclear
7763
7764@node WIN32
7765@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7766
c0065db7 7767This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
a05a5b64
TP
7768See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7769command-line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7770
7771@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7772@cindex import libraries
7773@item import libraries
69da35b5 7774The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7775libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7776regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7777archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03 7778support for creating such libraries provided with the
a05a5b64 7779@samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
2ca22b03 7780
c0065db7
RM
7781@item exporting DLL symbols
7782@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7783The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7784
7785@table @emph
7786@item using auto-export functionality
7787@cindex using auto-export functionality
7788By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
a05a5b64 7789which is controlled by the following command-line options:
dc8465bf 7790
0a5d968e
NC
7791@itemize
7792@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7793@item --exclude-symbols
7794@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7795@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7796@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7797@end itemize
7798
09e2aba4
DK
7799When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7800(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7801symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7802often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7803private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7804options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7805exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7806final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7807
7808If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7809command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7810if either of the following are true:
7811
7812@itemize
7813@item A DEF file is used.
7814@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7815@end itemize
dc8465bf 7816
c0065db7
RM
7817@item using a DEF file
7818@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7819Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7820an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7821exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7822name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7823command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7824
7825@example
7826gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7827@end example
7828
0a5d968e
NC
7829Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7830@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7831
dc8465bf
NC
7832Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7833
7834@example
4b5bd4e7 7835LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7836
7837EXPORTS
7838foo
7839bar
7840_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7841another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7842var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7843doo = foo == foo2
7844eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7845@end example
dc8465bf 7846
7fcab871 7847This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7848symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7849alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7850by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7851@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7852@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7853export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7854in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7855symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7856
6b31ad16
DS
7857The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7858name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7859the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7860
b45619c0
NC
7861When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7862library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7863@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7864executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7865
7866With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7867specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7868non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7869
7870If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7871or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7872filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7873
4b5bd4e7
DS
7874The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7875
7876@example
7877EXPORTS
7878 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7879 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7880 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7881@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7882
7883Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7884@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7885@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7886@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7887Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7888@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7889string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7890
7891The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7892
7893@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7894will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7895by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7896linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7897library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7898
7899@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7900The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7901the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7902@code{*_imp__foo}).
7903
7904@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7905well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7906read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7907variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7908the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7909extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7910application will behave unexpectedly.
7911
7912@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7913it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7914symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 7915API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 7916the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7917
4b5bd4e7
DS
7918See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7919other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7920
7921@cindex creating a DEF file
7922While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
a05a5b64 7923with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7924
7925@item Using decorations
7926@cindex Using decorations
7927Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7928itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7929declared as:
7930
7931@example
7932__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7933__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7934@end example
7935
7936All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7937any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7938this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7939the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7940
7941Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7942decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7943instead:
7944
7945@example
7946__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7947__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7948@end example
7949
c0065db7
RM
7950This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7951when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7952variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7953code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7954of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7955omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7956@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7957information.
c0065db7 7958@end table
dc8465bf 7959
2ca22b03
NC
7960@cindex automatic data imports
7961@item automatic data imports
7962The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7963by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7964compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7965issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7966code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7967c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7968initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7969decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7970platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7971command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7972The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7973suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7974trigger the feature's use.
7975
c0065db7 7976auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7977additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7978
c0065db7 7979"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7980documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7981
c0065db7
RM
7982The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7983occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7984One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7985below.
7986
7987@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7988For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7989object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7990offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7991field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7992in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7993without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7994The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7995references.
7996
c0065db7
RM
7997The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7998be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7999themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8000runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8001compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8002support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
8003run without error on an older system.
8004
c0065db7
RM
8005@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8006enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
8007
8008@cindex direct linking to a dll
8009@item direct linking to a dll
8010The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8011including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 8012libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 8013traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
8014libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8015function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8016though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 8017storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 8018tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
8019large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8020
c0065db7 8021Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 8022@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 8023of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
8024perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8025select the dll instead of an import library.
8026
2ca22b03 8027
69da35b5
NC
8028For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8029to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
8030
8031@example
45e948fe
NC
8032libxxx.dll.a
8033xxx.dll.a
8034libxxx.a
8035xxx.lib
f6c4d4b1 8036libxxx.lib
69da35b5 8037cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8038libxxx.dll
8039xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8040@end example
8041
69da35b5
NC
8042before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8043
c0065db7
RM
8044(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8045where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8046@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8047file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8048@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8049
c0065db7
RM
8050Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8051@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8052was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8053various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8054could coexist on the same machine.
8055
2ca22b03
NC
8056The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8057applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8058libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8059
8060@example
8061bin/
8062 cygxxx.dll
8063lib/
8064 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8065 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8066@end example
8067
c0065db7
RM
8068Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8069done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8070
80711. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8072@example
8073gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8074@end example
2ca22b03 8075
69da35b5
NC
8076However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8077(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8078@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8079not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8080
2ca22b03
NC
80812. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8082directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8083should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8084making the app/dll.
8085
8086@example
8087ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8088@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8089
8090Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8091
8092@example
8093gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8094@end example
69da35b5
NC
8095
8096This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8097perfectly legal
8098
8099@example
8100bin/
8101 cygxxx-5.dll
8102lib/
c0065db7 8103 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8104@end example
8105
dc8465bf 8106Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8107even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8108@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8109
8110Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8111wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8112
81131. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8114work with auto-imported data.
8115
dc8465bf
NC
81162. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8117import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8118symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8119for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8120possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8121
45e948fe
NC
81223. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8123critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8124in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8125stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8126
69da35b5 8127So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8128true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8129a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8130binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8131massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8132requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8133will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8134
c0065db7 8135@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8136@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8137@item adding additional names
8138Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8139A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8140exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8141when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8142import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8143
c0065db7 8144@example
dc8465bf
NC
8145LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8146
8147EXPORTS
c0065db7 8148foo
dc8465bf 8149_foo = foo
c0065db7 8150@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8151
8152The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8153
8154Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8155source code using the "weak" attribute:
8156
c0065db7
RM
8157@example
8158void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8159void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8160@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8161
8162See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8163symbols.
8164
8165@item renaming symbols
8166Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8167kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8168@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8169DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8170created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8171
c0065db7 8172@example
dc8465bf
NC
8173LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8174
8175EXPORTS
8176_foo = foo
c0065db7 8177@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8178
8179The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8180@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8181@end table
dc8465bf 8182
0a5d968e 8183Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
a05a5b64 8184unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
0a5d968e 8185If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8186@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8187that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8188@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8189renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8190to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8191the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8192In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8193which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8194
8195@cindex weak externals
8196@item weak externals
8197The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8198weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8199defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8200are three variants of weak externals:
8201@itemize
8202@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8203called lazy externals.
8204@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8205This form is not presently implemented.
8206@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8207implemented.
8208@end itemize
8209As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8210are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8211uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8212
8213@cindex aligned common symbols
8214@item aligned common symbols
8215As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8216desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8217the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8218carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8219by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8220tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8221but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8222warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8223
2ca22b03
NC
8224@end table
8225
8226@ifclear GENERIC
8227@lowersections
8228@end ifclear
8229@end ifset
8230
e0001a05
NC
8231@ifset XTENSA
8232@ifclear GENERIC
8233@raisesections
8234@end ifclear
8235
8236@node Xtensa
8237@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8238
8239@cindex Xtensa processors
8240The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8241@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8242specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8243keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8244example, with the command:
8245
8246@smallexample
8247SECTIONS
8248@{
8249 .text : @{
8250 *(.literal .text)
8251 @}
8252@}
8253@end smallexample
8254
8255@noindent
8256@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8257and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8258literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8259interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8260group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8261files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8262and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8263
43cd72b9 8264@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8265@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8266Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8267provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8268is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8269literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8270will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8271location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8272the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8273unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8274@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8275range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8276
8277For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8278to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8279instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8280instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8281instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8282@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8283hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8284By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8285switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8286density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8287instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8288performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8289linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8290a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8291
8292The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8293control the linker:
8294
8295@cindex Xtensa options
8296@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8297@item --size-opt
8298When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8299more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8300no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8301alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8302preserve the correctness of the code.
8303@end table
e0001a05
NC
8304
8305@ifclear GENERIC
8306@lowersections
8307@end ifclear
8308@end ifset
8309
252b5132
RH
8310@ifclear SingleFormat
8311@node BFD
8312@chapter BFD
8313
8314@cindex back end
8315@cindex object file management
8316@cindex object formats available
8317@kindex objdump -i
8318The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8319These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8320object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8321format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8322it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8323associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8324object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8325(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8326list all the formats available for your configuration.
8327
8328@cindex BFD requirements
8329@cindex requirements for BFD
8330As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8331several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8332BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8333formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8334been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8335BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8336may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8337
8338One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8339mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8340useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8341conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8342
8343@menu
8344* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8345@end menu
8346
8347@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8348@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8349@cindex opening object files
8350@include bfdsumm.texi
8351@end ifclear
8352
8353@node Reporting Bugs
8354@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8355@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8356@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8357
ff5dcc92 8358Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8359
8360Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8361it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8362to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8363work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8364@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8365
8366In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8367information that enables us to fix the bug.
8368
8369@menu
8370* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8371* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8372@end menu
8373
8374@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8375@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8376@cindex bug criteria
8377
8378If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8379
8380@itemize @bullet
8381@cindex fatal signal
8382@cindex linker crash
8383@cindex crash of linker
8384@item
8385If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8386@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8387
8388@cindex error on valid input
8389@item
ff5dcc92 8390If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8391
8392@cindex invalid input
8393@item
ff5dcc92 8394If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8395may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8396object files are correct.
8397
8398@item
8399If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8400improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8401@end itemize
8402
8403@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8404@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8405@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8406@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8407
8408A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8409products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8410recommend you contact that organization first.
8411
8412You can find contact information for many support companies and
8413individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8414distribution.
8415
ad22bfe8 8416@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8417Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8418@value{BUGURL}.
8419@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8420
8421The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8422@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8423fact or leave it out, state it!
8424
8425Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8426problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8427assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8428matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8429the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8430location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8431were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8432into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8433specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8434and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8435
8436Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8437the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8438on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8439
8440Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8441bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8442respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8443You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8444
8445To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8446
8447@itemize @bullet
8448@item
ff5dcc92 8449The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8450the @samp{--version} argument.
8451
8452Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8453the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8454
8455@item
ff5dcc92 8456Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8457patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8458
8459@item
8460The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8461version number.
8462
8463@item
ff5dcc92 8464What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8465``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8466
8467@item
8468The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8469observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8470list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8471sufficient.
8472
8473If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8474and then we might not encounter the bug.
8475
8476@item
8477A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8478bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8479provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8480bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8481state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8482requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8483we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8484attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8485
8486If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8487@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8488object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8489@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8490how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8491
8492@item
8493A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8494incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8495
ff5dcc92 8496Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8497will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8498not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8499a chance to make a mistake.
8500
8501Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8502say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8503copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8504C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8505and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8506fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8507you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8508any conclusion from our observations.
8509
8510@item
ff5dcc92 8511If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8512diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8513@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8514If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8515context, not by line number.
8516
8517The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8518sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8519@end itemize
8520
8521Here are some things that are not necessary:
8522
8523@itemize @bullet
8524@item
8525A description of the envelope of the bug.
8526
8527Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8528which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8529changes will not affect it.
8530
8531This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8532will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8533with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8534We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8535
8536Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8537of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8538output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8539less time, and so on.
8540
8541However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8542report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8543
8544@item
8545A patch for the bug.
8546
8547A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8548the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8549a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8550to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8551
ff5dcc92 8552Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8553construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8554through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8555able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8556fixed.
8557
8558And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8559patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8560help us to understand.
8561
8562@item
8563A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8564
8565Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8566things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8567@end itemize
8568
8569@node MRI
8570@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8571@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8572To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8573linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8574alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8575described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8576simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8577@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8578linker commands; these commands are described here.
8579
8580In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8581file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8582features to make use of them.
8583
8584You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8585@samp{-c} command-line option.
8586
8587Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8588command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8589blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8590MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8591issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8592
8593Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8594
8595You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8596lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8597The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8598
8599@table @code
8600@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8601@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8602@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8603Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8604the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8605@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8606your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8607script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8608commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8609input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8610@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8611
8612@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8613@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8614Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8615in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8616
8617@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8618
8619@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8620@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8621Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8622@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8623
8624@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8625@item BASE @var{expression}
8626Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8627absolute addresses) in the output file.
8628
8629@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8630@item CHIP @var{expression}
8631@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8632This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8633
8634@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8635@item END
8636This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8637
8638@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8639@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8640Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
dc12032b 8641language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
252b5132
RH
8642
8643@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8644@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8645Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8646@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8647
8648The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8649same line, with no change in its effect.
8650
8651@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8652@item LOAD @var{filename}
8653@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8654Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8655same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8656command line.
8657
8658@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8659@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8660@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8661MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8662option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8663
8664@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8665@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8666@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8667Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8668order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8669script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8670sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8671file, in the order specified.
8672
8673@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8674@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8675@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8676@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8677Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8678@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8679
8680@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8681@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8682@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8683@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8684You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8685specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8686If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8687@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8688@end table
8689
793c5807
NC
8690@node GNU Free Documentation License
8691@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8692@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8693
370b66a1
CD
8694@node LD Index
8695@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8696
8697@printindex cp
8698
8699@tex
7ca01ed9 8700% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8701% meantime:
8702\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8703\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8704\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8705\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8706\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8707\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8708\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8709\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8710\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8711% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8712@end tex
8713
252b5132 8714@bye
This page took 1.628991 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.